Command Reference

Part 1 Guide to the Manual
Table of Contents ......................................................................................... i

Guide to the Manual ..................................................................................... 1
Part 2 Command
Table of Commands ..................................................................................... i
advanced ...................................................................................................... 1
alarm box buffer browse ............................................................................... 1
alarm box buffer delete................................................................................. 1
alarm box buffer list ...................................................................................... 1
alarm box reset............................................................................................. 1
alarm box stopblink ...................................................................................... 1
alarm box stopring ........................................................................................ 1
alarm box version ......................................................................................... 1
alarm file browse .......................................................................................... 1
alarm file statinfo .......................................................................................... 1
alarm file del ................................................................................................. 1
alarm file list ................................................................................................. 1
alarm filter set ............................................................................................... 1
alarm filter show ........................................................................................... 1
alarm terminal disable .................................................................................. 1
alarm terminal enable ................................................................................... 1
basic ............................................................................................................. 1
bc add ........................................................................................................... 1
bc del ............................................................................................................ 1
bc set dce ..................................................................................................... 1
bc set dlci ..................................................................................................... 1
bc set dte ...................................................................................................... 1
bc set mode .................................................................................................. 1
bc set timeslot .............................................................................................. 1
bc show ........................................................................................................ 1
bssgp set bvctc............................................................................................. 1
bssgp set bvctf ............................................................................................. 1
bssgp set mstc ............................................................................................. 1
bssgp set mstf .............................................................................................. 1
bssgp set th .................................................................................................. 1
bssgp set t1 .................................................................................................. 1
bssgp set t2 .................................................................................................. 1
bssgp set t3 .................................................................................................. 1
bssgp set t4 .................................................................................................. 1
bssgp set t5 .................................................................................................. 1
bssgp show all .............................................................................................. 1
bssgp show bvctc ......................................................................................... 1
bssgp show bvctf .......................................................................................... 1
bssgp show mstc .......................................................................................... 1
bssgp show mstf ........................................................................................... 1
bssgp show th .............................................................................................. 1
bssgp show t1 .............................................................................................. 1
bssgp show t2 .............................................................................................. 1
bssgp show t3 .............................................................................................. 1
bssgp show t4 .............................................................................................. 1
bssgp show t5 .............................................................................................. 1
cell add ......................................................................................................... 1
cell del .......................................................................................................... 1
cell set .......................................................................................................... 1
cell show ....................................................................................................... 1
download batch ............................................................................................ 1
download config ........................................................................................... 1
download software ....................................................................................... 1
e1t1 add ....................................................................................................... 1
e1t1 del......................................................................................................... 1
e1t1 set......................................................................................................... 1
e1t1 show ..................................................................................................... 1
erase ............................................................................................................ 1
exec-timeout set ........................................................................................... 1
exec-timeout show ....................................................................................... 1
exit ................................................................................................................ 1
help............................................................................................................... 1
hostname...................................................................................................... 1
io reset .......................................................................................................... 1
io version set ................................................................................................ 1
io version show............................................................................................. 1
ipaddress add ............................................................................................... 1
ipaddress del ................................................................................................ 1
ipaddress set ................................................................................................ 1
ipaddress show ............................................................................................ 1
language ....................................................................................................... 1
log browse .................................................................................................... 1
log disable .................................................................................................... 1
log enable ..................................................................................................... 1
log state ........................................................................................................ 1
ms browse .................................................................................................... 1
ms inquire ..................................................................................................... 1
ms rename ................................................................................................... 1
mt bvc ptp block ........................................................................................... 1
mt bvc ptp reset ............................................................................................ 1
mt bvc ptp show state ................................................................................... 1
mt bvc ptp unblock ....................................................................................... 1
mt bvc signal reset ....................................................................................... 1
mt bvc signal show state .............................................................................. 1
mt cpu show ................................................................................................. 1
mt disk fault clear ......................................................................................... 1
mt disk fault show ......................................................................................... 1
mt disk format ............................................................................................... 1
mt disk partition ............................................................................................ 1
mt disk show ................................................................................................. 1
mt fr bc block ................................................................................................ 1
mt fr bc clear bcinfo ...................................................................................... 1
mt fr bc show statinfo ................................................................................... 1
mt fr bc unblock ............................................................................................ 1
mt fr pmc reset ............................................................................................. 1
mt fr port reset .............................................................................................. 1
mt fr port show loop ...................................................................................... 1
mt fr port start loop ....................................................................................... 1
mt fr port stop loop ....................................................................................... 1
mt fr pvc active ............................................................................................. 1
mt fr pvc clear pvcinfo .................................................................................. 1
mt fr pvc deactive ......................................................................................... 1
mt fr pvc show stateinfo ................................................................................ 1
mt gcell active ............................................................................................... 1
mt gcell block................................................................................................ 1
mt gcell deactive ........................................................................................... 1
mt gcell reset ................................................................................................ 1
mt gcell send psi ........................................................................................... 1
mt gcell show attr ......................................................................................... 1
mt gcell show available ................................................................................ 1
mt gcell show cgi .......................................................................................... 1
mt gcell show state ....................................................................................... 1
mt gcell show unavailable ............................................................................ 1
mt gcell unblock ............................................................................................ 1
mt lapd block ................................................................................................ 1
mt lapd loop set ............................................................................................ 1
mt lapd loop show ........................................................................................ 1
mt lapd port loop set ..................................................................................... 1
mt lapd port show state ................................................................................ 1
mt lapd show available ................................................................................. 1
mt lapd show state ....................................................................................... 1
mt lapd show unavailable ............................................................................. 1
mt lapd unblock ............................................................................................ 1
mt nsvc block................................................................................................ 1
mt nsvc reset ................................................................................................ 1
mt nsvc show state ....................................................................................... 1
mt nsvc unblock ............................................................................................ 1
mt pcic block ................................................................................................. 1
mt pcic show available ................................................................................. 1
mt pcic show state ........................................................................................ 1
mt pcic show unavailable ............................................................................. 1
mt pcic show unused .................................................................................... 1
mt pcic show used ........................................................................................ 1
mt pcic unblock............................................................................................. 1
mt pdch block ............................................................................................... 1
mt pdch show attr ......................................................................................... 1
mt pdch show available ................................................................................ 1
mt pdch show list .......................................................................................... 1
mt pdch show ms ......................................................................................... 1
mt pdch show state ...................................................................................... 1
mt pdch show unavailable ............................................................................ 1
mt pdch unblock ........................................................................................... 1
mt sattrans show delay................................................................................. 1
mt system boardversion ............................................................................... 1
mt system forceswitch .................................................................................. 1
mt system softversion ................................................................................... 1
mt time set .................................................................................................... 1
mt time show ................................................................................................ 1
ns set aliveretry ............................................................................................ 1
ns set alivetimer ........................................................................................... 1
ns set blockretry ........................................................................................... 1
ns set blocktimer .......................................................................................... 1
ns set resetretry ............................................................................................ 1
ns set resettimer ........................................................................................... 1
ns set testtimer ............................................................................................. 1
ns set unblockretry ....................................................................................... 1
ns show aliveretry ......................................................................................... 1
ns show alivetimer ........................................................................................ 1
ns show all .................................................................................................... 1
ns show blockretry ........................................................................................ 1
ns show blocktimer ....................................................................................... 1
ns show resetretry ........................................................................................ 1
ns show resettimer ....................................................................................... 1
ns show testtimer ......................................................................................... 1
ns show unblockretry.................................................................................... 1
nse add......................................................................................................... 1
nse del .......................................................................................................... 1
nse set .......................................................................................................... 1
nse show ...................................................................................................... 1
nsvc add ....................................................................................................... 1
nsvc del ........................................................................................................ 1
nsvc set ........................................................................................................ 1
nsvc show ..................................................................................................... 1
omc set switchip ........................................................................................... 1
omc set switchport ........................................................................................ 1
omc show all ................................................................................................. 1
omc show switchip ....................................................................................... 1
omc show switchport .................................................................................... 1
patch active .................................................................................................. 1
patch confirm ................................................................................................ 1
patch deactive .............................................................................................. 1
patch load ..................................................................................................... 1
patch remove................................................................................................ 1
patch show ................................................................................................... 1
pcu add attr .................................................................................................. 1
pcu add bscname ......................................................................................... 1
pcu add cspara ............................................................................................. 1
pcu add e1exchange .................................................................................... 1
pcu add e1slot .............................................................................................. 1
pcu add extmsrpar ........................................................................................ 1
pcu add gprs ................................................................................................. 1
pcu add lapd ................................................................................................. 1
pcu add ncreselectpar .................................................................................. 1
pcu add neighbour ........................................................................................ 1
pcu add nwctrlmsrpar ................................................................................... 1
pcu add pccch .............................................................................................. 1
pcu add pdchpara ......................................................................................... 1
pcu add prach ............................................................................................... 1
pcu add psi1 ................................................................................................. 1
pcu add pwpar .............................................................................................. 1
pcu add relatedinfo ....................................................................................... 1
pcu add reselectpar ...................................................................................... 1
pcu add sattrans ........................................................................................... 1
pcu add servpar ............................................................................................ 1
pcu cellconfig add ......................................................................................... 1
pcu cellconfig dynset .................................................................................... 1
pcu check cellconfig ..................................................................................... 1
pcu check e1config....................................................................................... 1
pcu del allofonecell ....................................................................................... 1
pcu del alltable ............................................................................................. 1
pcu del attr .................................................................................................... 1
pcu del bscname .......................................................................................... 1
pcu del cspara .............................................................................................. 1
pcu del e1exchange ..................................................................................... 1
pcu del e1slot ............................................................................................... 1
pcu del extmsrpar ......................................................................................... 1
pcu del gprs .................................................................................................. 1
pcu del lapd .................................................................................................. 1
pcu del ncreselectpar ................................................................................... 1
pcu del neighbour ......................................................................................... 1
pcu del nwctrlmsrpar .................................................................................... 1
pcu del pccch ............................................................................................... 1
pcu del pdchpara .......................................................................................... 1
pcu del prach ................................................................................................ 1
pcu del psi1 .................................................................................................. 1
pcu del pwpar ............................................................................................... 1
pcu del relatedinfo ........................................................................................ 1
pcu del reselectpar ....................................................................................... 1
pcu del sattrans ............................................................................................ 1
pcu del servpar ............................................................................................. 1
pcu limit showssn ......................................................................................... 1
pcu set attr .................................................................................................... 1
pcu set bscname .......................................................................................... 1
pcu set cspara .............................................................................................. 1
pcu set e1exchange ..................................................................................... 1
pcu set e1slot ............................................................................................... 1
pcu set extmsrpar ......................................................................................... 1
pcu set gprs .................................................................................................. 1
pcu set lapd .................................................................................................. 1
pcu set ncreselectpar ................................................................................... 1
pcu set neighbour ......................................................................................... 1
pcu set nwctrlmsrpar .................................................................................... 1
pcu set pccch ............................................................................................... 1
pcu set pdchpara .......................................................................................... 1
pcu set prach ................................................................................................ 1
pcu set psi1 .................................................................................................. 1
pcu set pwpar ............................................................................................... 1
pcu set relatedinfo ........................................................................................ 1
pcu set reselectpar ....................................................................................... 1
pcu set sattrans ............................................................................................ 1
pcu set servpar ............................................................................................. 1
pcu show attr ................................................................................................ 1
pcu show bscname....................................................................................... 1
pcu show cellconfig ...................................................................................... 1
pcu show cspara .......................................................................................... 1
pcu show e1exchange .................................................................................. 1
pcu show e1slot ............................................................................................ 1
pcu show extmsrpar ..................................................................................... 1
pcu show gprs .............................................................................................. 1
pcu show lapd .............................................................................................. 1
pcu show lccell ............................................................................................. 1
pcu show ncreselectpar ................................................................................ 1
pcu show neighbour ..................................................................................... 1
pcu show nwctrlmsrpar................................................................................. 1
pcu show pccch ............................................................................................ 1
pcu show pdchpara ...................................................................................... 1
pcu show prach ............................................................................................ 1
pcu show psi1 ............................................................................................... 1
pcu show pwpar ........................................................................................... 1
pcu show relatedinfo .................................................................................... 1
pcu show reselectpar ................................................................................... 1
pcu show sattrans ........................................................................................ 1
pcu show servpar ......................................................................................... 1
pcu switch set celltransferflag ...................................................................... 1
pcu switch set gbtransferflag ........................................................................ 1
pcu switch show all....................................................................................... 1
pcu switch show celltransferflag ................................................................... 1
pcu switch show gbtransferflag .................................................................... 1
pmc reset...................................................................................................... 1
pmc version query running ........................................................................... 1
pmc version query starting ........................................................................... 1
pmc version set running ............................................................................... 1
pmc version set starting ............................................................................... 1
route add ...................................................................................................... 1
route del ....................................................................................................... 1
route set ....................................................................................................... 1
route show .................................................................................................... 1
show client .................................................................................................... 1
show clock .................................................................................................... 1
show history ................................................................................................. 1
show running-config ..................................................................................... 1
show startup-config ...................................................................................... 1
slot add ......................................................................................................... 1
slot del .......................................................................................................... 1
slot show ...................................................................................................... 1
snmp add traphost ........................................................................................ 1
snmp del traphost ......................................................................................... 1
snmp set contact .......................................................................................... 1
snmp set heartbeattrap ................................................................................ 1
snmp set location ......................................................................................... 1
snmp set rocommunity ................................................................................. 1
snmp set rwcommunity................................................................................. 1
snmp set trap................................................................................................ 1
snmp show all ............................................................................................... 1
super ............................................................................................................ 1
user add ....................................................................................................... 1
user delete .................................................................................................... 1
user password .............................................................................................. 1
user setpwd .................................................................................................. 1
user show ..................................................................................................... 1
write .............................................................................................................. 1
HUAWEI
1. Guide to the Manual
2. Command
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit

Command Reference
V300R003
Command Reference
Manual Version T2-031949-20050205-C-3.36
Product Version V300R003
BOM 31190149
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company
headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, SoftX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE,
OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
About This Manual
Version
The product version that corresponds to the manual is M900/M1800 Packet Control
Unit V300R003.
Related Manuals
The following manuals provide more information about the M900/M1800 Packet
Control Unit.
Manual Content
It provides an overall introduction to the PCU, including the

M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit Technical
functions, structure, interface, technical indices, configuration and
Manual
examples, etc.

It provides information for cabinet, frame, board and cable of PCU.
Hardware Description Manual

It provides information for installing the hardware of PCU.
Installation Manual
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit It introduces the method to configure the data for PCU according
Operation Manual- Data Configuration to the actual configuration procedure.

It introduces the common operation offered by PCU.
Operation Manual -Routine Operation
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit It introduces the basic concept; basic operation offered by
Operation Manual-Performance performance measurement system of PCU, it details all the
Measurement measuring item as well.
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit It introduces all the alarm and their related handling method of
Maintenance Manual-Alarm Handling PCU.
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit It introduces the breakdown may occurred in the maintenance of
Maintenance Manual-Troubleshooting PCU and their handling methods.

It introduces all the commands offered by PCU system.
Command Reference
Organization of the Manual
The manual consists of 2 modules.
Module 1 is a overall introduction of how to user the command,

Module 2 introduces in detail each commands.
Intended Readers
The manual is intended for the following readers:

z Installation engineers & technicians
z Operation & maintenance personnel
Conventions
This document uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions
Convention Description
Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Arial Narrow Warnings, cautions, notes and tips are in Arial Narrow.
Bold Headings, Command, Command Description are in boldface.
Terminal Display is in Courier New; message input by the user via the terminal is in
Terminal Display
boldface.
II. Command conventions
Convention Description
italic font Command arguments for which you supply values are in italics.
[] Elements in square brackets [ ] are optional.
Alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is
{ x | y | ... }
selected.
Optional alternative keywords are grouped in square brackets and separated by

[ x | y | ... ]
vertical bars. One (or none) is selected.
Alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A

{ x | y | ... } *
minimum of one and maximum of all can be selected.
Optional alternative keywords are grouped in square brackets and separated by

[ x | y | ... ] *
vertical bars. Many (or none) are selected.
! A line starting with an exclamation mark is comments.
III. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in this document to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the
operation.
Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary description.

HUAWEI

Command Reference
Part 1 Guide to the Manual

Command Reference Guide to the Manual
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Guide to the Manual ......................................................................................................................... 1
i
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit Guide to the Manual
Guide to the Manual
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit Command Reference provides detailed

descriptions about how to implement equipment maintenance by using Huawei’s
Packet Control Unit equipment MML (Man-Machine Language).
I. Introduction
This reference manual includes usage descriptions for all user commands provided
by Huawei’s PCU equipment. Contents of this manual are comprised of two parts:
--- Guide to the Manual: This part introduces M900/M1800 PCU MML and the
contents, structure, function of the M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit Command
Reference, as well as the character sequence index for all commands.
--- Command: Command descriptions are the major part of this manual. Descriptions
of each command include command function, mode, usage, options, result, see also,
notes and examples.
All commands described in the manual are arranged in alphabetical order.
The description format and contents of the command description part are shown in
Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Structure of command description part in command reference
Items Contents
[Function] To describe the functions enabled by the command
[Mode] To describe the modes for command usage
To describe the command format, such as command key words, command
[Usage]
parameters, mandatory and optional features of parameters, etc.
[Options] To describe parameter types in the command and there value range
To describe the output information on MML terminal after command execution and
[Results]
specific meanings of the information
[See Also] To describe relative commands
[Notes] To describe the suitable occasions for the command and the matters to be attended
[Example] To describe the usage and output information of the command with typical examples
II. Relative documentation
Operation section inM900/M1800 Packet Control Unit Operation Manual.
Page 1 of 9
Command Reference
III. Terminal setup
Maintenance personnel can set up connection with PCU equipment via the terminal
and input MML commands to manage PCU equipment. They can use any client
terminal software that supports Telnet protocol to log on PCU system.
IV. Command format
All commands of PCU MML comprise the key word part and the optional parameter
part.
The key word part contains one or more key words, each of which is a sequence of
character and figure starting with characters. As the unique identifier for commands,
different key words are adopted for different commands.
The parameter part is optional according to different commands. The number of

parameter items and values in the parameter part are different for different
commands.
The space bar should be adopted between key words, between parameters, and
between the parameter and the key word.
In describing the command format, the manual adopts the following mode:
Key word 1 key word 2 ... key word n [parameter 1] [parameter 2] ... [parameter n]
--- Key word part: in bold letters
--- Parameter part: in italic
In describing parameters, this manual makes use of the following symbols:
--- <>
--- []
--- |
--- {}
Meanings and usage examples of the symbols are shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Parameter format regulation
Symbol Meaning Example

slot add <SlotNo > <BoardClass> <PMC0> <PMC1>
To indicate that the parameter item is an The command contains 4 mandatory parameters.
<> mandatory parameter and can not be SlotNo, BoardClass, PMC0 and PMC1 are parameter
omitted in inputting command. names and should be replaced with specific values in
command input.
Page 2 of 9
Command Reference
Symbol Meaning Example

alarm file browse [<AlarmID> <AlarmLevel>
<AlarmMid> <BoardNo>] [<BeginTime> <EndTime>]
[<FileName>]
The command includes three groups of optional
parameters. [ ] contains optional parameters, which
must always occur simultaneously. The command can
have the following 8 combinations:
alarm file browse input no parameters;
alarm file browse <AlarmID> <AlarmLevel>
<AlarmMid> <BoardNo> <BeginTime> <EndTime>
<FileName> input all parameters;
To indicate that the parameter item is an <AlarmMid> <BoardNo> input only the first group of
[] optional parameter and can be omitted parameters;
in inputting command. alarm file browse <BeginTime> <EndTime> input only
the second group of parameters;
alarm file browse <FileName> input only the third
group of parameters;
<AlarmMid> <BoardNo> <BeginTime> <EndTime>
input parameters of the first and the second groups;
<AlarmMid> <BoardNo> <FileName> input parameters
of the first and the third groups;
alarm file browse <BeginTime> <EndTime>
<FileName> input parameters of the second and the
third groups.
To indicate only one of the two slot show <SlotNo>|all the command can have two
| parameter items at both sides of the input modes:
symbol must be input. slot show <SlotNo> or slot show all.
bc show {<BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID>} | all
To indicate that all parameters items in The three parameters in “{}” must always occur
{} “{ }” are integrated and must always simultaneously. The command has two input modes as
occur simultaneously. follows:
bc show <boardNo> <localNo> <BCID> or bc show all.
V. Command structure
According to different key words, all PCU MML commands can be classified into
several command groups.
A command group is a set of one or more commands. The first n key words of the
commands are the same. The command group is identified by the same n key words.
For example, the command of ns add, ns del, ns set and ns show belong to the
same command group ns.
Big command groups comprise smaller command groups and other commands.
VI. Command mode
To ensure the safe operations of the equipment, the PCU command line interface
provides command modes of four levels. Each command mode has different
operation authority.
Page 3 of 9
Command Reference
z Normal user mode

z Basic user mode
z Advanced user mode
z Super user mode
1) Normal user mode:
Upon logging on PCU, the user is in normal user mode. In this mode, the user can
only check the current subscriber information, system clock and hardware/software
status information.
2) Basic user mode:
In this mode, commands can be provided to enable the user to check some of the
current equipment information of PCU. Configuration and maintenance operations
can not be executed. Password is to be input to enter this command mode.
3) Advanced user mode:
This is a command mode with higher authority than the basic user mode. In this
command mode, many commands that affect system can be executed. The user must
input password when entering the advanced user mode from the normal user mode.
Operation and maintenance personnel mainly adopts this command mode. It includes
most commands for configuring and maintaining system.
Super user mode:
This is a command mode with higher authority than the advanced user mode. In this
command mode, in addition to all commands executed under the advanced user
mode, the user can download configuration files and delete configuration information
in the Flash Memory. To enter the super user mode from the normal user mode, the
user must input password. This command mode includes all commands needed by
the user in configuring and maintaining system.
The user can enter other command modes from the normal user mode in order to
execute different commands.
Specific commands to be executed in different modes are briefly introduced in

Table 1-3.
Page 4 of 9
Command Reference
Table 1-3 PCU operation commands in different command modes
Command Mode Executable Command Command Description

advanced Enter advanced user mode
basic Enter basic user mode
exit Exit configuration
Normal user mode
help Description of the interactive help system
language Switch language mode (English, Chinese)
super Enter the super user mode
alarm Alarm operation command
bc BC configuration command
bssgp BSSGP configuration command
cell Cell configuration command
e1t1 E1 configuration command
exec-timeout Set and show the auto disconnect time
exit Return to normal user mode
ms PCU measurement and statistics command
Basic user mode
mt PCU maintenance command
ns NS configuration command
nse NSE configuration command
nsvc NSVC configuration command
omc OMC configuration command
pcu PCU configuration command
show Show running system information
slot Slot configuration command
user User maintenance command
alarm Alarm operation command
exit Return to the normal user mode
Advanced user mode mt PCU maintenance command
slot slot configuration command
write Write running configuration to flash memory
Super user mode alarm Alarm operation command
download Download command
erase Erase configuration information in the flash memory
exit Return to normal user mode
hostname Set host name command
io RPPU board maintenance command
ipaddress IP address maintenance command
log Log of command line
Page 5 of 9
Command Reference
Command Mode Executable Command Command Description

mt PCU maintenance command
patch Patch operation command
pmc L2PU/PMC board maintenance command
reboot Reboot equipment command
route Route configuration command
slot Slot configuration command
snmp SNMP configuration command
write Write running configuration to Flash Memory
VII. Input command
PCU MML command input should be in conformity to the following rules:

z Capital and small letters are of no difference in commands.
z Space bar must be adopted between key words, between key word and
parameter.
z In inputting key words and parameters, the described sequence in the command
format must be obeyed. Optional parameters can be skipped if it is not
necessary.
z Key words and parameters of commands can be in abbreviated forms. The
abbreviation rule is to adopt the first n characters according to the character
sequence of command key words. In the case one abbreviation is matched to
more than one command key words or more than one command parameters, the
abbreviation should not be used.
z Up to 255 characters can be input for one command.
z Functional keys listed in Table 1-4 are supported.
Table 1-4 Command line editing function keys
Key Function
If the maximum character number permitted is not reached, insert corresponding
Character key and figure key
character or figure to the current cursor position and move cursor to the right.
Enter Execute the input command.
Input “?” at any time and MML will output corresponding online help. Characters
?
input before “?” will be repeated in the next line.
BACKSPACE Delete the current character.
Ctrl+K Move the cursor to the previous character.
Ctrl+L Move the cursor to the next character.
Ctrl+C Stop the execution of the current command and return to the prompt.
Ctrl+P Display the previously executed command.
Ctrl+O Display the next executed command.
Other keys PCU MML does not recognize other keys except the above functional keys.
Page 6 of 9
Command Reference
VIII. Command line help
PCU MML provides the following online help:
In normal user mode, input help to get the brief description about the help system.
Please refer to Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Command line help (1)
z In any command mode, input “?” to get all commands, command groups and
brief descriptions in the command mode. Please refer to Figure 1-2.
z Enter a command group and a “?” after a space, the system will list all commands
under the command group. Please refer to Figure 1-3.
Page 7 of 9
Command Reference
z Enter a complete command (it might be a command or command group + space

+ command) and a “?” after a space, the system will list brief help and
parameters of the command. Please refer to Figure 1-4.
Enter a character string followed by “?”, the system will list all commands and
command groups started with the character string. Please refer to Figure 1-5.
z Enter a main command followed with a character string and a “?”, the system will
list all commands starting with the character string. Please refer to Figure 1-6.
Page 8 of 9
Command Reference
Page 9 of 9
HUAWEI

Command Reference
Part 2 Command
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit Table of Commands
Table of Commands
Command Meaning Command Mode

advanced Enter Advanced user mode Common user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm box buffer browse Show alarm buffer details
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm box buffer delete Delete alarm in alarm buffer
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm box buffer list Show alarm buffer summary
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm box reset Reset alarm box
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm box stopblink Stop alarm box alarm indicator flashing
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm box stopring Stop alarm box ringing
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm box version Query alarm box version
Super user mode
Basic user mode
alarm file browse Browse alarm file contents Advanced user mode
Super user mode
obtain the total number of alarms and collect statistics Advanced user mode
alarm file statinfo
of the alarms Super user mode
Basic user mode
alarm file del Delete alarm file Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
alarm file list View directory Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm filter set Set alarm display filtering condition
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm filter show Show alarm display filtering condition
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm terminal disable Close current alarm terminal
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
alarm terminal enable Enable current terminal to be alarm terminal
Super user mode
basic Enter Basic user mode Common user mode
Advanced user mode
bc add Add BC data
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
bc del Delete BC data
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
bc set dce Modify BC DCE parameter
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
bc set dlci Modify BC DLCI
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
bc set dte Modify BC DTE parameter
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
bc set mode Modify BC mode
Super user mode
bc set timeslot Modify BC timeslot Advanced user mode
Page 1 of 11
Command Reference

Super user mode
Basic user mode
bc show Display BC data Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Modify timer length of sending Flow Control PDUs for Advanced user mode
bssgp set bvctc
a given BVC Super user mode
Modify timer length of guarding the Advanced user mode
bssgp set bvctf
BVC-FLOW-CONTROL procedure Super user mode
Modify timer length of sending Flow Control PDUs for Advanced user mode
bssgp set mstc
a given MS Super user mode
bssgp set mstf
MS-FLOW-CONTROL procedure Super user mode
Modify Interval after Flow-Control-Ms before SGSN Advanced user mode
bssgp set th
may use Bmax and R Super user mode
Modify timer length of guarding the (un)block Advanced user mode
bssgp set t1
procedure Super user mode
Advanced user mode
bssgp set t2 Modify timer length of guarding the reset procedure
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
bssgp set t3 Modify timer length of guarding the suspend procedure
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
bssgp set t4 Modify timer length of guarding the resume procedure
Super user mode
bssgp set t5
RA-CAPABILITY-UPDATE procedure Super user mode
Advanced user mode
bssgp show all Display all BSSGP system data
Super user mode
Display timer length of sending Flow Control PDUs for Advanced user mode
bssgp show bvctc
a given BVC Super user mode
Display timer length of guarding the Advanced user mode
bssgp show bvctf
BVC-FLOW-CONTROL procedure Super user mode
Display timer length of sending Flow Control PDUs for Advanced user mode
bssgp show mstc
a given MS Super user mode
bssgp show mstf
MS-FLOW-CONTROL procedure Super user mode
Display Interval after Flow-Control-Ms before SGSN Advanced user mode
bssgp show th
may use Bmax and R Super user mode
Display timer length of guarding the (un)block Advanced user mode
bssgp show t1
Advanced user mode
bssgp show t2 Display timer length of guarding the reset procedure
Super user mode
Display timer length of guarding the suspend Advanced user mode
bssgp show t3
Advanced user mode
bssgp show t4 Display timer length of guarding the resume procedure
Super user mode
bssgp show t5
RA-CAPABILITY-UPDATE procedure Super user mode
Advanced user mode
cell add Add cell configuration
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
cell del Delete cell configuration
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
cell set Modify cell configuration
Super user mode
Basic user mode
cell show Display cell configuration Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Page 2 of 11
Command Reference

download batch Download command batch file Super user mode
download config Download configuration file Super user mode
download software Download software Super user mode
Advanced user mode
e1t1 add Add E1 or T1 data
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
e1t1 del Delete E1 or T1 data
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
e1t1 set Modify E1 or T1 data
Super user mode
Basic user mode
e1t1 show Display E1 and T1 data Advanced user mode
Super user mode
erase Erase configure information from the FLASH memory Super user mode
Basic user mode
exec-timeout set Set the auto disconnect time Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
exec-timeout show Show the auto disconnect time Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Normal user mode
Basic user mode
exit Exit to normal user mode or exit configuration
Advanced user mode
Super user mode
help System help command description Normal user mode
hostname Modify hostname Super user mode
io reset Reset RPPU board Super user mode
io version set Modify the version of RPPU board Super user mode
io version show Display the version of RPPU board Super user mode
ipaddress add Add an IP address Super user mode
ipaddress del Delete an IP address Super user mode
ipaddress set Modify an IP address Super user mode
ipaddress show Display an IP address Super user mode
Basic user mode
language Language mode switching Advanced user mode
Super user mode
log browse Browse log information Super user mode
log disable Disable command log function Super user mode
log enable Enable command log function Super user mode
log state Show command log state Super user mode
Basic user mode
ms browse Browse performance measurement result Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
ms inquire Show performance measurement task information Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
ms rename Modify the performance measurement task name
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt bvc ptp block Block PTP
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt bvc ptp reset Reset PTP
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt bvc ptp show state Query PTP state Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Page 3 of 11
Command Reference

Advanced user mode
mt bvc ptp unblock Unblock PTP
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt bvc signal reset Reset SIG
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt bvc signal show state Query SIG state Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt cpu show Show CPU occupancy of specified board Advanced user mode
Super user mode
mt disk fault clear Clear hard disk fault information Super user mode
mt disk fault show Show hard disk fault information Super user mode
mt disk format Format hard disk Super user mode
mt disk partition Partition hard disk Super user mode
mt disk show Show hard disk information Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt fr bc block Block BC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt fr bc clear bcinfo Clear BC state information
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt fr bc show statinfo Query BC information Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt fr bc unblock Unblock BC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt fr pmc reset Reset PMC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt fr port reset Reset port
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt fr port show loop Query port loop-back information Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt fr port start loop Start port loop-back
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt fr port stop loop End port loop-back
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt fr pvc active Activate PVC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt fr pvc clear pvcinfo Clear PVC information
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt fr pvc deactive Deactivate PVC
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt fr pvc show stateinfo Query PVC information Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt gcell active Activate cell
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt gcell block Block cell
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt gcell deactive Deactivate cell
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt gcell reset Reset cell
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt gcell send psi Send cell PSI
Super user mode
Page 4 of 11
Command Reference

Basic user mode
mt gcell show attr Show the attribute of cell Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt gcell show available Show availablet cells Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt gcell show cgi Query cell’s CGI Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt gcell show state Query cell’s state Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt gcell show
Show unavailable cells Advanced user mode
unavailable
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt gcell unblock Unblock packet cell
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt lapd block Block LAPD
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt lapd loop set Set LAPD loop mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt lapd loop show Show LAPD loop mode Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt lapd port loop set LAPD port loop information
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt lapd port show state Show LAPD port information Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt lapd show available Show available LAPDs Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt lapd show state Show LAPD's state Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt lapd show
Show unavailable LAPDs Advanced user mode
unavailable
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt lapd unblock Unblock LAPD
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt nsvc block Block NSVC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt nsvc reset Reset NSVC
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt nsvc show state Query NSVC state Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt nsvc unblock Unblock NSVC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt pcic block Block PCIC
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt pcic show available Show available PCIC Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Page 5 of 11
Command Reference

Basic user mode
mt pcic show state Show PCIC's state Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt pcic show
Show unavailable PCIC Advanced user mode
unavailable
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt pcic show unused Show unused PCIC Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt pcic show used Show used PCIC Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt pcic unblock Unblock PCIC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt pdch block Block PDCH
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt pdch show attr Show PDCH attributes Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt pdch show available Show available PDCH Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt pdch show list Show cell's PDCH list Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt pdch show ms Show the number of MSs on pdch Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt pdch show state Show PDCH's state Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt pdch show
Show unavailable PDCH Advanced user mode
unavailable
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
mt pdch unblock Unblock PDCH
Super user mode
inquire the delay information of the specified Advanced user mode
mt sattrans show delay
channel or of all channels of a cell Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt system boardversion Show hardware version Advanced user mode
Super user mode
mt system forceswitch Force the switch between active and standby POMU Super user mode
Basic user mode
mt system softversion Show software version Advanced user mode
Super user mode
mt time set Set date and time of the active POMU Super user mode
mt time show Show date and time of the active POMU Super user mode
Advanced user mode
ns set aliveretry Modify Alive retry times
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
ns set alivetimer Modify Alive timer
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
ns set blockretry Modify Block retry times
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
ns set blocktimer Modify block timer
Super user mode
Page 6 of 11
Command Reference

Advanced user mode
ns set resetretry Modify reset retry times
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
ns set resettimer Modify reset timer
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
ns set testtimer Modify test timer
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
ns set unblockretry Modify unblock retry times
Super user mode
Basic user mode
ns show aliveretry Show Alive retry times Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
ns show alivetimer Show Alive timer Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
ns show all Show all NS data Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
ns show blockretry Show block retry times Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
ns show blocktimer Show block timer Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
ns show resetretry Display reset retry times Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
ns show resettimer Display reset timer Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
ns show testtimer Display test timer Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
ns show unblockretry Display unblock retry times Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
nse add Add NSE
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
nse del Delete NSE
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
nse set Modify NSE
Super user mode
Basic user mode
nse show Display NSE Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
nsvc add Add NSVC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
nsvc del Delete NSVC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
nsvc set Modify NSVC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
nsvc show Display NSVC
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
omc set switchip Modify OMC server’s IP address
Super user mode
Page 7 of 11
Command Reference

Advanced user mode
omc set switchport Modify OMC Switch server’s Socket port number
Super user mode
Basic user mode
omc show all Display all OMC data Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
omc show switchip Display OMC server’s IP address Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
omc show switchport Display OMC server’s Socket port number Advanced user mode
Super user mode
patch active Activate patch Super user mode
patch confirm Confirm patch Super user mode
patch deactive Deactivate patch Super user mode
patch load Load patch Super user mode
patch remove Remove patch Super user mode
patch show Show patch information Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add attr Add a record in attribute table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add bscname Add a record in bscname table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add cspara Add a record in CS parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add e1exchange Add a record in E1 exchange table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add e1slot Add a record in E1 timeslot table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add extmsrpar Add a record in extended measure parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add gprs Add a record in GPRS options table of a logical cell
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add lapd Add a record in LAPD table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add ncreselectpar Add a record in neighbour cell reselect parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add neighbour Add a record in neighbour cell table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add nwctrlmsrpar Add a record in network control measure table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add pccch Add a record in PCCCH table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add pdchpara Add a record in PDCH parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add prach Add a record in PRACH table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add psi1 Add a record in PSI1 table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add pwpar Add a record in power control table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add relatedinfo Add a record in related information table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add reselectpar Add a record in reselect parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu add sattrans Add a record in satellite transmission parameter table
Super user mode
Page 8 of 11
Command Reference

Advanced user mode
pcu add servpar Add a record in service parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu cellconfig add Add a cell configuration
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu cellconfig dynset Modify a cell configuration and make it take effect
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu check cellconfig Check configurations about a cell Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu check e1cofig Check E1 configurations Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del allofonecell Delete all configuration about one logical cell
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del alltable Delete all table configure in PCU
Super user mod
Advanced user mode
pcu del attr Delete a record in attribute table
Super user mod
Advanced user mode
pcu del bscname Delete a record in bscname table
Super user mod
Advanced user mode
pcu del cspara Delete a record in CS parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del e1exchange Delete a record in E1 exchange table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del e1slot Delete a record in E1 timeslot table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del extmsrpar Delete a record in extended measure parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del gprs Delete a record in GPRS Options table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del lapd Delete a record in LAPD table
Super user mode
Delete a record in neighbour cell reselect parameter Advanced user mode
pcu del ncreselectpar
table Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del neighbour Delete a record in neighbour cell table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del nwctrlmsrpar Delete a record in network control measure table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del pccch Delete a record in PCCCH table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del pdchpara Delete a record in PDCH parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del prach Delete a record in PRACH table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del psi1 Delete a record in PSI1 table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del pwpar Delete a record in power control table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del relatedinfo Delete a record in related information table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu del reselectpar Delete a record in reselect parameter table
Super user mode
Delete a record in satellite transmission parameter Advanced user mode
pcu del sattrans
Page 9 of 11
Command Reference

Advanced user mode
pcu del servpar Delete a record in service parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu limit showssn Show the license information of the system
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set attr Modify a record in attribute table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set bscname Modify a record in bscname table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set cspara Modify a record in CS parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set e1exchange Modify a record in E1 exchange table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set e1slot Modify a record in E1 timeslot table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set extmsrpar Modify a record in extended measure parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set gprs Modify a record in GPRS Options table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set lapd Modify a record in LAPD table
Super user mode
Modify a record in neighbour cell reselect parameter Advanced user mode
pcu set ncreselectpar
Advanced user mode
pcu set neighbour Modify a record in neighbour cell table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set nwctrlmsrpar Modify a record in network control measure table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set pccch Modify a record in PCCCH table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set pdchpara Modify a record in PDCH parameter table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set prach Modify a record in power control table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set psi1 Modify a record in PSI1 table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set pwpar Modify a record in power control table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set relatedinfo Modify a record in related information table
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu set reselectpar Modify a record in reselect parameter table
Super user mode
Modify a record in satellite transmission parameter Advanced user mode
pcu set sattrans
Advanced user mode
pcu set servpar Modify a record in service parameter table
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show attr Show a record in attribute table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
Pcu show bscname Show a record in bscname table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show cellconfig Show all configuration about a logical cell Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Page 10 of 11
Command Reference

Basic user mode
pcu show cspara Show a record in CS parameter table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show e1exchange Show a record in E1 exchange table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show e1slot Show a record in E1 timeslot table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show extmsrpar Show a record in extended measure parameter table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show gprs Show a record in GPRS options table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show lapd Show a record in LAPD table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show lccell Show a record in logical cell table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
Show a record in neighbour cell reselect parameter
pcu show ncreselectpar Advanced user mode
table
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show neighbour Show a record in neighbour cell table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show nwctrlmsrpar Show a record in network control measure table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show pccch Show a record in PCCCH table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show pdchpara Show a record in PDCH parameter table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show prach Show a record in PRACH table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show psi1 Show a record in PSI1 table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show pwpar Show a record in power control table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show relatedinfo Show a record in related information table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show reselectpar Show a record in reselect parameter table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Basic user mode
pcu show sattrans Show a record in satellite transmission parameter table Advanced user mode
Super user mode
Page 11 of 11
Command Reference

Basic user mode
pcu show servpar Show a record in s Advanced user mode
Super user mode
pcu switch set Advanced user mode
Set the cell transfer flag of PCU
celltransferflag Super user mode
pcu switch set Advanced user mode
Set the Gb transfer flag of PCU
gbtransferflag Super user mode
Advanced user mode
pcu switch show all Display all switchs of PCU
Super user mode
pcu switch show Advanced user mode
Display the cell transfer flag of PCU
celltransferflag Super user mode
pcu switch show Advanced user mode
Display the Gb transfer flag of PCU
gbtransferflag Super user mode
pmc reset Reset L2PU board(Gb) Super user mode
pmc version query
Display the version of running L2PU board(Gb) Super user mode
running
pmc version query
Display the version of starting L2PU board(Gb) Super user mode
starting
pmc version set running Modify the version of running L2PU board(Gb) Super user mode
pmc version set starting Modify the version of starting L2PU board(Gb) Super user mode
reboot Reboot system Super user mode
route add Add the information of the route Super user mode
route del Delete the information of the route Super user mode
route set Modify the information of the route Super user mode
route show Show the information of the route Super user mode
Advanced user mode
show client Display current client information
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
show clock Display system clock
Super user mode
show history Display the history commands Super user mode
Advanced user mode
show running-config Display current running configurations
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
show startup-config Display configurations in FLASH
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
slot add Add board
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
slot del Delete board
Super user mode
slot power Power on or off the special slot Super user mode
Advanced user mode
snmp add traphost Add trap host IP address for SNMP
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
snmp del traphost Delete trap host IP address for SNMP
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
snmp set contact Add trap host IP address for SNMP
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
snmp set heartbeattrap Set heartbeat trap flag for SNMP
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
snmp set location Set location of device for SNMP
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
snmp set rocommunity Set read-only community for SNMP
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
snmp set rwcommunity Set read-write community for SNMP
Super user mode
Page 12 of 11
Command Reference

Advanced user mode
snmp set trap Set trap flag for SNMP
Super user mode
Advanced user mode
snmp show all Show all parameters for SNMP
Super user mode
super Enter super maintenance mode Normal user mode
user add Add a PCU user Super user mode
user delete Delete PCU users Super user mode
Basic user mode
user password PCU user modify his own password Advanced user mode
Super user mode
user setpwd Reset a PCU user's password Super user mode
user show Show PCU users Super user mode
Advanced user mode
write Write running configuration to flash memory
Super user mode
Page 13 of 11
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit advanced
advanced
Function
This command is used to enter advanced user mode.
Mode
Normal user mode.
Usage
advanced
Options
None.
Results
Success Ask the operator for the user name and admission key.
See Also
exit
Notes
None
Example
Enter the advanced user mode (Providing the user name to this mode is Jack and the
password is 123321).
pcu>advanced
User name:Jack(Input Jack, and then <Enter>)
Password: (Input 123321, and then <Enter>)
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit advanced
pcu (advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box buffer browse
alarm box buffer browse
Function
This command is used to browse the details of fault alarms unrecovered in current
system.
Mode
Basic user mode, advanced user mode, super user mode
Usage
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the details of fault alarms unrecovered in the current system.
Failure Failure causes.
See Also
alarm box buffer list
Notes
None.
Example
Browse the details of fault alarms uncovered in current system.
pcu(advanced)# alarm box buffer browse
--------------------
AlarmCsnNo: 0
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box buffer browse
AlarmID: 1928 Level: CRITICAL Name: Alarm Box Fault
FrameNo: 0 BoardNo: 6 Module: ALARM Time: 2002-01-02 09:53:00
Parameter: FrameNo=0, BoardNo=6, ErrorNo=11
Meaning : This alarm is reported when the system fails to detect the
alarm box.
Handling : 1. If no alarm box is installed, ignore it.
2. If ErrorNo is 10, replace it with an alarm box of GM12 or
higher version.
3. If ErrorNo is 11, please check the serial interface cable.
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box buffer delete
alarm box buffer delete
Function
Use this command to delete the fault alarm of the specified alarm CSN number or of
the specified alarm ID. You can choose either AlarmCsnNo or AlarmID as the
parameter.
Mode
super user mode
Usage
alarm box buffer delete <AlarmCsnNo> <AlarmID>
Options
AlarmCsnNo Alarm Csn number, which will be shown in the command "alarm
box buffer browse"
AlarmID Alarm ID range: 1500 ~ 1999
Results
Success Operation successful

See Also

Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box buffer delete
Example
Delete the fault alarms with the alarm Csn number 1712 which is uncovered in current
system.
pcu(advanced)# alarm box buffer delete 1712
Operation successful
pcu(advanced)#
If you want to specify an alarm ID as the parameter, you need to append “AlarmID”
after the alarm ID.
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box buffer list
Function
This command is used to browse the brief of fault alarms uncovered in current
system.
Mode
Usage
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the brief of fault alarms unrecovered in current

system.
See Also
Notes
None.
Example
Browse the brief of fault alarms unrecovered in current system.
pcu(advanced)# alarm box buffer list
ID LEVEL BOARD MODULE ALARM_NAME
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box buffer list
1928 0 6 ALARM Alarm Box Fault
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box reset
alarm box reset
Function
This command is used to reset alarm box.
Mode
Usage
alarm box reset
Options
None.
Results
See Also
alarm box stopring

alarm box stopblink
alarm box version
Notes
This command will be valid only when the alarm box is connected to the PCU system
correctly and in normal condition.
Example
Reset the alarm box.
pcu(advanced)#alarm box reset
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box reset
operation successful
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box stopblink
alarm box stopblink
Function
This command is used to stop alarm indicator.
Mode
Usage
alarm box stopblink <AlarmLevel>
Options
AlarmLevel Level of alarms. 0~3, all
Results

See Also
alarm box stopring
Notes
None.
Example
Stop alarm indicator.
pcu(advanced)#alarm box stopblink 2
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box stopring
alarm box stopring
Function
This command is used to stop alarm sound.
Mode
Usage
alarm box stopring <AlarmLevel>
Options
AlarmLevel Level of alarms. 0~3, none
Results

See Also
alarm box stopblink
Notes
None.
Example
Stop alarm sound.
pcu(advanced)#alarm box stopring 2
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm box version
alarm box version
Function
This command is used to show alarm box version information.
Mode
Usage
alarm box version
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the information of alarm box version.
See Also
None.
Notes
None.
Example
Show alarm box version information.

pcu(advanced)#alarm box version
Version: GM11ALMM REV0 SV02100(20000707)LV01100
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm file browse
alarm file browse
Function
This command is used to browse alarm file.
Mode
Usage
Alarm file browse {[<AlarmID> <AlarmLevel> <AlarmMid> <BoardNo>]

[<BeginTime> <EndTime>] [<FileName>]}
Options
AlarmID Alarm serial 1500~1999, none

number
none-Do not filtrate the alarm with Alarm ID.
1500~1999-Show the alarm with the selected
alarmID
AlarmLevel Level of alarms 0~3, none

none-Do not filtrate the alarm with AlarmLevel
AlarmLevel
AlarmMid ID of the module 0 ~ 53, none

that reports the
alarm none-Do not filtrate the alarm with AlarmMid
AlarmMid
BoardNo Serial number of 0 ~ 47, none

the board where
alarms are none-Do not filtrate the alarm with BoardNo
reported 0~47-Show the alarm with the selected
BoardNo
BeginTime The start time of The format is HH:MM:SS.

alarm records
browse When the parameter is assigned to 0:0:0, it
means to view alarm records from the first
alarm record generated that day.
Page 1 of 4
Command Reference
EndTime The end time of The format is HH:MM:SS.
alarm record
browse When the parameter is assigned to 0:0:0, it
means to view alarm records to the last alarm
record.
FileName Alarm file name Alarm file name conforms to DOS 8.3 file
name conventions.
Results
Success The maintenance terminal types the alarm data records.

See Also
alarm file statinfo

alarm file list
alarm file del
Notes
1) Before executing this command, make sure:

z Local file system and hard disk have been installed correctly
z TELNET connections between maintenance console and PCU system have
been established successfully
2) The introduction of AlarmLevel.
Table 1-1 The relationship between AlarmLevel and Alarm Level
AlarmLevel Alarm Level

0 Critical
1 Major
2 Minor
3 warning
Page 2 of 4
Command Reference
3) The particular information on AlarmMid
Table 1-2 The relationship between AlarmMid and Alarm module
AlarmMid Module which produce the Alarm

0 Operation System(OS)
1 Configure Database(CDB)
2 O&M module on PRRU card(OM_RPPU)
3 Performance date Measurement on RPPU card(MS_RPPU)
4 LAPD module(LAPD)
5 GCELLM module(GCELLM)
6 GRRM module(GRRM)
7 GRLM module(GRLM)
8 MAC module(MAC)
9 Radio Link Control module(RLC)
10 Mailbox module(MAILBOX)
11 PTP module on PCU site(PTP_PCU)
12 Signalling module on PCU site(SIG_PCU)
13 Message transfer module on PCU site(DISP_PCU)
14 NS module(NS)
15 PTP module on GSN site(PTP_GSN)
16 Signalling module on GSN site(SIG_GSN)
17 LLC module on GSN site(LLC_GSN)
18 SNDCP module on GSN site(SNDCP_GSN)
19 Message transfer module on GSN site(DISP_GSN)
20 O&M module in RPPU card(OM_IO)
21 Performance data Measurement in RPPU card(MS_RPPU)
22 Charging module(CHARGE)
23 FR module in L2PU card(L2PU_FR)
24 MTP2 module on L2PU card(L2PU_MTP2)
25 LAPD module in L2PU card(L2PU_LAPD)
26 TRAU module in L2PU card(L2PU_TRAU)
27 O&M module in L2PU card(OM_L2PU)
28 O&M module on PCU site(OM_PCU)
29 Performance data Measurement on PCU site(MS_PCU)
30 O&M module on GSN site(OM_GSN)
31 Performance data Measurement on GSN site(MS_GSN)
32 Alarm module(ALARM)
33 L2PU Agent(L2PU_AGENT)
34 Subscriber Database(SDB)
35 Session Management module(SM)
36 Short Message (SMS)
37 Signalling GTP(GTP_S)
38 GMM module(GMM)
39 Message transfer Part(MTP)
40 Signalling connection control part(SCCP)
41 TCAP module(TCAP)
42 MT1 module(MTI)
43 MAP module(MAP)
44 BSSAP module(BSSAP)
45 BAM module on PCU site(BAM_PCU)
46 BAM module on GSN site(BAM_GSN)
47 SNMP module(SNMP)
48 IP module(IP)
49 DNS module(DNS)
50 GTP data transmission part(GTP_T)
51 RADIUS module(RADIUS)
52 Reserved
53 OAM module(OAM)
Page 3 of 4
Command Reference
4) For relationship between AlarmID and Alarm name, please refer to the alarm
processing section in the M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit Maintenance Manual
–Alarm handling.
5) Alarm file name conforms to DOS 8.3 file naming conventions. Its extension
name is ALM (case insensitive). Other alarm formats (i.e., the extension name is
not ALM) is regarded as invalid alarm files.
Example
Browse the alarm record produced from 16:10:12 to 19:10: 18 in May 9th, 2001 with
the AlarmLevel critical.
pcu(advanced)# alarm file browse
--------------------
AlarmID: 1928 Level: CRITICAL Name: Alarm Box Fault
FrameNo: 0 BoardNo: 6 Module: ALARM Time: 2001-05-09 09:53:00
Parameter: FrameNo=0, BoardNo=6, ErrorNo=11
Meaning : This alarm is reported when the system fails to detect the
alarm box.
Handling : 1. If no alarm box is installed, ignore it.
2. If ErrorNo is 10, replace it with an alarm box of GM12 or
higher version.
3. If ErrorNo is 11, please check the serial interface cable.
pcu(advanced)#
Page 4 of 4
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm file statinfo
alarm file statinfo
Function
Use this command to obtain the total number of alarms and collect statistics of the
alarms in alarm files by alarm ID, alarm level, time of alarm occurrences, or alarm
name
Mode
Advanced user mode, super user mode
Usage
alarm file statinfo {[<FileName>]}
Options
FileName The alarm file name in the DOS 8.3 format. The extension name
is case-insensitive “ALM”. The system deems other file formats
(with the extension name other than ALM) as invalid. Note that
the alarm file name cannot contain the following characters:
Illegal character: \ / : \ " < > |
Directory information: for example “/pcu/data/alarm”
wildcard character: * ?
Results
Success Show alarms and number of occurrences on the alarm

terminal.
Failure Failure causes
See Also
alarm file browse

alarm file list
alarm file del
Page 1 of 4
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm file statinfo
Notes
1) The preconditions for alarm file browse include:

z The hard disk and local file system have been correctly installed in the GPRS
PCU system.
z The maintenance system has set up a Telnet connection with the PCU system.
2) DOS 8.3 naming rule is as follows:
A DOS8.3 name consists of a file name and an extension name separated by ”.”. The
file name consists of up to eight characters and the extension name up to three,
3) The parameter is optional.
If you do not specify the parameter, the system collects statistics of alarm records on
the current day. If you specify the parameter <FileName>, the system collects
statistics of alarm records on the day specified by the file name.
Example
To collect statistics of alarm records on the day specified by the file name:
BSCGPRS(super)#alarm file sta
If alarm file is in large size, Please wait...
***The total number of alarm is 46***
AlarmID Level Times Alarm Name
1766 MAJOR 22 Pb E1 Local Port Out-of-syn
1767 MAJOR 21 Pb E1 Local Port Out-of-syn Removed
1851 MAJOR 1 Standby POMU Fault
1870 MINOR 1 Alarm Box Fault
1872 CRITICAL 1 PMC/L2PU Fault
Page 2 of 4
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm file del
alarm file del
Function
This command is used to delete the alarm file from the hardware connects to the
POMU board.
Mode
Usage
alarm file del <FileName>|all
Options
FileName Name of the alarm file to be deleted.
all Delete all the alarm files.
Results
Success Information related.
See Also
alarm file browse
Notes
Before executing this command, make sure:

1) Local file system and hard disk have been installed correctly.
2) TELNET connections between maintenance console and PCU have been
established successfully.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm file del
Example
1) Delete all the alarm files.

pcu(advanced)#alarm file del all
All the alarm files have been deleted successfully!
The number of deleted alarm files: 6
pcu(advanced)#
2) Delete the alarm record produced on July 1st, 2001.
pcu(advanced)#alarm file del 20010701.alm
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm file list
alarm file list
Function
This command is used to browse the contents of PCU alarm directory.
Mode
Usage
alarm file list
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the contents of PCU alarm directory.

See Also
alarm file browse
Notes
Before executing this command, make sure:

1) Local file system and hard disk have been installed correctly
2) TELNET connections between maintenance console and PCU have been
established successfully
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm file list
Example
List all the alarm files in the PCU system.

pcu(advanced)#alarm file list
<DIR> MAR-21-2001 09:14:18
<DIR> MAR-21-2001 09:14:18
20010321.ALM 509,988 MAR-21-2001 10:02:04
20010322.ALM 6,184,960 MAR-22-2001 09:14:18
20010323.ALM 10,999 MAR-23-2001 02:10:22
20010324.ALM 17,786 MAR-24-2001 22:10:10
20010325.ALM 6,289 MAR-25-2001 23:14:56
20010326.ALM 2,488 MAR-26-2001 21:02:36
20010327.ALM 3,860 MAR-27-2001 23:03:22
7 file(s) 6,736,370 bytes
2 dir(s) 1,964,467 KB free
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm filter set
alarm filter set
Function
This command is used to set alarm display conditions.
Mode
Usage
alarm filter set <AlarmID> <AlarmLevel> <AlarmMid> <BoardNo>
Options
AlarmID Alarm serial 1500~1999, none

number
none-Do not filtrate the alarm with Alarm
ID.
1500~1999-Show the alarm with the
selected alarm ID
AlarmLevel Level of alarms 0 ~ 3, none

none-Alarms of all levels will be displayed
0~3-Show the alarms with the selected
alarm level
AlarmMid ID of the module 0 ~ 53, none

that reports the
alarm none-Do not filtrate the alarm with
AlarmMid
AlarmMid
BoardNo Serial number of 0 ~ 47, none

the board where
alarms are reported none-Do not filtrate the alarm with BoardNo
BoardNo
Page 1 of 3
Command Reference
Results

See Also
alarm filter show.
Notes
1) This command is used to set alarm real-time display conditions. When

maintenance console is set as alarm terminal, system alarms will be displayed
on the alarm terminal., This command can also be used when only part of the
alarms are to be viewed
2) The introduction of AlarmLevel.
Table 1-1 The relationship between AlarmLevel and Alarm Level.
AlarmLevel Alarm Level

0 Critical
1 Major
2 Minor
3 warning
3) The particular information on AlarmMid.
Table 1-2 The relationship between AlarmMid and Alarm module

0 Operation System(OS)
1 Configure Database(CDB)
2 O&M module on PRRU card(OM_RPPU)
3 Performance date Measurement on RPPU card(MS_RPPU)
4 LAPD module(LAPD)
5 GCELLM module(GCELLM)
6 GRRM module(GRRM)
7 GRLM module(GRLM)
8 MAC module(MAC)
9 Radio Link Control module(RLC)
10 Mailbox module(MAILBOX)
11 PTP module on PCU site(PTP_PCU)
12 Signalling module on PCU site(SIG_PCU)
13 Message transfer module on PCU site(DISP_PCU)
14 NS module(NS)
15 PTP module on GSN site(PTP_GSN)
16 Signalling module on GSN site(SIG_GSN)
17 LLC module on GSN site(LLC_GSN)
18 SNDCP module on GSN site(SNDCP_GSN)
19 Message transfer module on GSN site(DISP_GSN)
20 O&M module in RPPU card(OM_IO)
21 Performance data Measurement in RPPU card(MS_RPPU)
Page 2 of 3
Command Reference
22 Charging module(CHARGE)
23 FR module in L2PU card(L2PU_FR)
24 MTP2 module on L2PU card(L2PU_MTP2)
25 LAPD module in L2PU card(L2PU_LAPD)
26 TRAU module in L2PU card(L2PU_TRAU)
27 O&M module in L2PU card(OM_L2PU)
28 O&M module on PCU site(OM_PCU)
29 Performance data Measurement on PCU site(MS_PCU)
30 O&M module on GSN site(OM_GSN)
31 Performance data Measurement on GSN site(MS_GSN)
32 Alarm module(ALARM)
33 L2PU Agent(L2PU_AGENT)
34 Subscriber Database(SDB)
35 Session Management module(SM)
36 Short Message (SMS)
37 Signalling GTP(GTP_S)
38 GMM module(GMM)
39 Message transfer Part(MTP)
40 Signalling connection control part(SCCP)
41 TCAP module(TCAP)
42 MT1 module(MTI)
43 MAP module(MAP)
44 BSSAP module(BSSAP)
45 BAM module on PCU site(BAM_PCU)
46 BAM module on GSN site(BAM_GSN)
47 SNMP module(SNMP)
48 IP module(IP)
49 DNS module(DNS)
50 GTP data transmission part(GTP_T)
51 RADIUS module(RADIUS)
52 Reserved
53 OAM module(OAM)
4) The relationship between AlarmID and Alarm title please refer to the PCU User’s
Manual.
Example
1) Only show the alarm produced by GCELLM module(The AlarmMid of GCELLM

module is 5).
pcu(advanced)# alarm filter none none 5 none
Operation Successful
pcu(advanced)#
2) Only show the critical alarm from the third RPPU card.
pcu(advanced)# alarm filter none 0 none 3
Operation Successful
pcu(advanced)#
Page 3 of 3
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm filter show
alarm filter show
Function
This command is used to show alarm display conditions.
Mode
Usage
alarm filter show
Options
None
Results

See Also
alarm filter set
Notes
This command is used to show alarm real-time display conditions
Example
pcu(advanced)# alarm filter show
No alarm display filter found in system
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm terminal disable
alarm terminal disable
Function
This command is used to disable alarm terminal.
Mode
Usage
Options
None.
Results
See Also
alarm terminal enable
Notes
This command is valid only on alarm terminal.
Example
Disable alarm terminal.
pcu(advanced)#alarm terminal disable
Operation successful!
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit alarm terminal enable
Function
This command is used to set current maintenance console as alarm terminal.
Mode
Basic user mode, advanced user mode, Super user mode
Usage
Options
None.
Results
Success Operation successful!
See Also
Notes
None.
Example
Set current Maintenance console as alarm terminal.
pcu(advanced)#alarm terminal enable
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit basic
basic
Function
This command is used to enter basic user mode.
Mode
Normal user mode
Usage
basic
Options
None.
Results
See Also
exit
Notes
None.
Example
Enter the basic user mode (Consider the user name to this mode is Jack and the
pcu>basic
Password: 123321 (Input 123321, and then <Enter>)
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit basic
pcu(basic)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc add
bc add
Function
This command is used to add an item of BC data.
Mode
Usage
bc add <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID> <TimeSlot> <DLCIType>

<Mode> <Protocol> [dte <UserN391> <UserN392>
<UserN393> <UserT391>][dce <NetN392> <NetN393>
<NetT392>]
Options
BoardNo Board No. 0~5, 10~15
LocalNo Local No. 0~3
BCID BCID. 0~30
TimeSlot Occupied time slot 4 bytes in hex
DLCIType DLCI type 1~5
1 - DLCI_LEN_2O_10BIT
Mode Mode dte, dce, nni
protocol Protocol type Q933, ansi, cisco
UserN391 DTE parameter 1~255
Page 1 of 3
Command Reference
UserT391 DTE parameter 5~30
NetN392 DCE parameter 1~10
NetT392 DCE parameter 5~30
Results

See Also
bc set dlci
bc set dte
bc set mode
bc set timeslot
bc show
bc del
Notes
The first seven fields must be entered, and dte and dce parameters are conditionally
optional. The program will process according to the default values. If the Mode is "dte",
entering dce parameter is not allowed. If the Mode is "dce", entering dte parameter is
not allowed. If the Mode is "nni", all parameters can be entered. Besides, if a certain
kind of parameter is to be entered, corresponding key words (dte or dce) must be
entered before it.
1) UseN392 ≤ UserN393, NetN392 ≤ NetN393
2) Same ports (BoardNo and LocalNo) cannot occupy the same timeslot.
3) Time slot No.0 cannot be occupied, and all the time slots being 0 is not allowed.
4) BoardNo and PortNo should exist in e1t1 table
Example
Add one BC on No.0 RPPU board and specify its local No. as 0, BCID as 0, TimeSlot
as 3, DLCIType as I, mode as nni, protocol type as q933, DTE parameter UserN391
as 10, UserN392 as 5, UserN393 as 5, UserT391 as 15, DCE parameter NetN392 as
5, NetN393 as 5, NetT392 as 15.
Page 2 of 3
Command Reference
pcu(advanced)# bc add 0 0 0 00000008 1 nni q933 dte 10 5 5 15 dce 5 5 15
pcu(advanced)#
Page 3 of 3
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc del
bc del
Function
This command is used to delete a certain item of BC data.
Mode
Usage
bc del <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID>
Options
BCID BCID. 0~30
Results

See Also
bc set dlci
bc set dte
bc set mode
bc set timeslot
bc show
bc add
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc del
Example
Delete one BC on No.0 RPPU board with its local No. as 0, BCID as 0.
pcu(advanced)# bc del 0 0 0
Are you sure to delete the record(s)? [Y/N] y
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc set dce
bc set dce
Function
This command is used to modify an item of BC DCE data.
Mode
Usage
bc set dce <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID> <NetN392> <NetN393>

<NetT392>
Options
BCID BCID. 0~30
NetT392 DCE parameter 5~30
Results

See Also
bc set dlci
bc set dte
bc set mode
bc set timeslot
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc set dce
bc show
bc del
bc add
Notes
NetN392 ≤ NetN393
Example
Modify the DCE parameter of a BC with its board No as 0, local No as 0, BCID as 0.

Modify its NetN392 into 5, NetN393 into 5 and NetT392 into 15.
pcu(advanced)# bc set dce 0 0 0 5 5 15
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc set dlci
bc set dlci
Function
This command is used to modify the DLCI type of a BC.
Mode
Usage
bc set dlci <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID> <DLCIType>
Options
BCID BCID. 0~30
DLCIType 1~5
DLCI type
Results

See Also
bc set dce
bc set dte
bc set mode
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc set dlci
bc set timeslot
bc show
bc del
bc add
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the DLCI type of a BC whose Board No.is 0, local No is 0 and BCID is 0 into
DLCI_LEN_2O_10BIT.
pcu(advanced)# bc set dlci 0 0 0 1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc set dte
bc set dte
Function
This command is used to modify the DTE data of a BC.
Mode
Usage
bc set dte <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID> <UserN391> <UserN392>
<UserN393> <UserT391>
Options
BCID BCID. 0~30
UserT391 DTE parameter 5~30
Results
See Also
bc set dce
bc set dlci
bc set mode
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc set dte
bc set timeslot
bc show
bc del
bc add
Notes
UseN392 ≤ UserN393.
Example
Modify the DTE data of a BC whose Board No. is 0, local No is 0 and BCID is 0: the
UserN391 need to be modified into 10, the UserN392 need to be modified into 5, the
UserN393 need to be modified into 5 and the UserT391 need to be modified into 15..
pcu(advanced)# bc set dte 0 0 0 10 5 5 15
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc set mode
bc set mode
Function
This command is used to modify the mode of a BC.
Mode
Usage
bc set mode <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID> <mode> <Protocol>
Options
BCID BCID. 0~30
mode mode dte, dce, nni
Protocol Protocol q933, ansi, cisco
Results

See Also
bc set dce
bc set dlci
bc set dte
bc set timeslot
bc show
bc del
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc set mode
bc add
Notes
UseN392 ≤ UserN393.
Example
Modify the mode of a BC whose Board No is 0, local No is 0 and BCID is 0 and

modify the mode into dte, the protocol into q933.
pcu(advanced)# bc set mode 0 0 0 dte q933
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc set timeslot
bc set timeslot
Function
This command is used to modify the timeslot that a BC occupied.
Mode
Usage
bc set timeslot <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID> <Timeslot>
Options
BCID BCID. 0~30
TimeSlot Occupied time slot 4 bytes in hex
Results

See Also
bc set dce
bc set dlci
bc set dte
bc set mode
bc show
bc del
bc add
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc set timeslot
Notes
1) The same E1 (same BoardNo and LocalNo) should not occupy the same
timeslot.
2) The zero time slot must not be occupied, and all the time slots being zero is not
allowed.
Example
Modify the timeslot that the BC whose Board No is 0, local No is 0 and BCID is 0
occupied into the fourth one.
pcu(advanced)# bc set timeslot 0 0 0 00000010
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc show
bc show
Function
This command is used to show the information of one or all the BC.
Mode
Basic maintenance mode, advanced user mode, super user mode
Usage
bc show {<BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID>} | all
Options
BCID BCID. 0~30
all Show the information of all the BC None
Results
Success Show the information of the BC

See Also
bc set dce
bc set dlci
bc set dte
bc set mode
bc set timeslot
bc del
bc add
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bc show
Notes
None.
Example
Show the configuration of the BC whose Board No is 0, Local No is 0 and BCID is 0.
pcu(advanced)# bc show 0 0 0
BoardNo :0
LocalNo :0
BCID :0
TimeSlot : 00000010
DLCIType : 1
Mode : DTE
Protocol : Q933
UserN391 : 6
UserN392 : 3
UserN393 : 4
UserT391 : 10
NetN392 :3
NetN393 :4
NetT392 : 15
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set bvctc
bssgp set bvctc
Function
This command is used to modify minimum interval between sending of subsequent

flow control PDUs for a given BVC.
Mode
Usage
bssgp set bvctc <value>
Options
value The value of BVCTC 1000~10000, default value is 5000
Results

Failure Failure Causes
See Also
bssgp show bvctc
Notes
None
Example
Modify the BVCTC into 2000ms.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp set bvctc 2000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set bvctc
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set bvctf
bssgp set bvctf
Function
This command is used to modify length of timer that monitors the

BVC-FLOW-CONTROL procedure.
Mode
Usage
bssgp set bvctf <value>
Options
value The value of BVCTF 1000~3000, default value is 1000
Results

See Also
bssgp show bvctf
Notes
None
Example
Modify the BVCTF into 2000ms.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp set bvctf 2000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set bvctf
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set mstc
bssgp set mstc
Function
This command is used to modify minimum interval between sending of subsequent

Flow Control PDUs for a given MS.
Mode
Usage
bssgp set mstc <value>
Options
1000~10000, default value is

value The value of MSTC
5000
Results

See Also
bssgp show mstc
Notes
None
Example
Modify the MSTC into 2000ms.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp set mstc 2000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set mstc
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set mstf
bssgp set mstf
Function
This command is used to modify the length of time that monitors the
MS-FLOW-CONTROL procedure.
Mode
Usage
bssgp set mstf <value>
Options
value The value of MSTF 1000~3000, default value is 1000
Results

See Also
bssgp show mstf
Notes
None
Example
Modify the MSTF into 2000ms.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp set mstf 2000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set mstf
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set th
bssgp set th
Function
This command is used to modify Interval between the receiving of Flow-Control-MS

and the using of SGSN generated Bmax and R.
Mode
Usage
bssgp set th <value>
Options
value The value of th 5000~6000000, default value is 100000
Results

See Also
bssgp show th
Notes
None
Example
Modify the TH into 500000.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp set th 500000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set th
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp set t1
bssgp set t1
Function
This command is used to modify the length of timer that monitors the (un)blocking
procedure.
Mode
Usage
bssgp set t1 <value>
Options
value The value of T1 1000~30000, default value is 10000
Results

See Also
bssgp show t1
Notes
None
Example
Modify the T1 into 20000.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp set t1 20000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
bssgp set t2
Function
This command is used to modify the length of timer that monitors the reset procedure.
Mode
Usage
Options
Results

See Also
bssgp show t2
Notes
None
Example
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
bssgp set t3
Function
This command is used to modify the length of timer that monitors the suspend
procedure.
Mode
Usage
Options
Results

See Also
bssgp show t3
Notes
None
Example
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
bssgp set t4
Function
This command is used to modify the length that monitors the resume procedure.
Mode
Usage
Options
Results

See Also
bssgp show t4
Notes
None
Example
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
bssgp set t5
Function
This command is used to modify the length which monitors the RA-Capability-Update
procedure.
Mode
Usage
Options
Results

See Also
bssgp show t5
Notes
None
Example
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show all
bssgp show all
Function
This command is used to display all the BSSGP system information.
Mode
Usage
bssgp show all
Options
None.
Results
Success Show all the BSSGP system information
See Also
None.
Notes
None
Example
Display all the BSSGP system information.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp show all
T1: 10000
T2: 10000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show all
T3: 3000
T4: 3000
T5: 10000
MSTc: 5000
MSTf: 1000
BVCTc: 5000
BVCTf: 1000
Th: 100000
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show bvctc
bssgp show bvctc
Function
This command is used to show minimum interval between sending of subsequent

flow control PDUs for a given BVC.
Mode
Usage
bssgp show bvctc
Options
None.
Results
Success Show BVCTC
See Also
bssgp set bvctc
Notes
None
Example
Display the BVCTC.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp show bvctc
BvcTc: 5000
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show bvctf
bssgp show bvctf
Function
This command is used to inquire the length of time that monitors

BVC-FLOW-CONTROL procedure.
Mode
Usage
bssgp show bvctf
Options
None.
Results
Success Show BVCTF
See Also
bssgp set bvctf
Notes
None
Example
Inquire the BVCTF.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp show bvctf
BvcTf: 1000
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show mstc
bssgp show mstc
Function
This command is used to display the minimum interval between sending of

subsequent Flow Control PDUs for a given MS.
Mode
Usage
bssgp show mstc
Options
None.
Results
Success Show MSTC

See Also
bssgp set mstc

bssgp show all
Notes
None
Example
Display the MSTC.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show mstc
pcu(advanced)# bssgp show mstc
MsTc: 5000
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show mstf
bssgp show mstf
Function
This command is used to display the length of timer that monitors

MS-FLOW-CONTROL procedure.
Mode
Usage
bssgp show mstf
Options
None.
Results
Success Show MSTF
See Also
bssgp set mstf

bssgp show all
Notes
None
Example
Display the MSTF.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp show mstf
MsTf : 1000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show mstf
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show th
bssgp show th
Function
This command is used to display Interval between the receiving of Flow-Control-MS

and the using of SGSN generated Bmax and R.
Mode
Usage
bssgp show th
Options
None.
Results
Success Show TH
See Also
bssgp set th
bssgp show all
Notes
None
Example
Show the TH.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp show th
Th: 100000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show th
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit bssgp show t1
bssgp show t1
Function
This command is used to display the length of timer that monitors the (un)blocking
procedure.
Mode
Usage
bssgp show t1
Options
None.
Results
Success Show T1
See Also
bssgp set t1
bssgp show all
Notes
None
Example
Display the T1.
pcu(advanced)# bssgp show t1
T1: 10000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
bssgp show t2
Function
This command is used to display the length of timer that monitors the reset
procedure.
Mode
Basic maintenance mode, advanced user mode, Super user mode
Usage
bssgp show t2
Options
None.
Results
Success Show T2
See Also
bssgp set t2
Notes
None
Example
Display the T2.
T2: 10000
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
bssgp show t3
Function
This command is used to display the length of timer which monitors the suspend
procedure.
Mode
Usage
bssgp show t3
Options
None.
Results
Success Show T3
See Also
bssgp set t3
bssgp show all
Notes
None
Example
Display the T3.
T3: 3000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
bssgp show t4
Function
This command is used to display the length of timer that monitors the resume
procedure.
Mode
Usage
bssgp show t4
Options
None.
Results
Success Show T4
See Also
bssgp set t4
Notes
None
Example
Display the T4.
T4: 3000
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
bssgp show t5
Function
This command is used to display the length of timer that monitors the
RA-Capability-Update procedure.
Mode
Usage
bssgp show t5
Options
None.
Results
Success Show T5
See Also
bssgp set t5
bssgp show all
Notes
None
Example
Display the T5.
T5: 10000
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit cell add
cell add
Function
This command is used to add a cell and specify CellID, NSEI, the No. of the active
and standby boards where the cell is located, BVCI and BSSID.
Mode
Advanced user mode, super user mode.
Usage
cell add <CellID> <NSEI> <OrgPrmBoardNo> <OrgSlvBoardNo>

<BVCI> <BSSID>
Options
CellID Cell identifier 15 or 16 digits. The first 5 (in the

case of 15 digits) or 6 (in the case
of 16 digits) is required to be in
BCD, and the 10 digits followed be
in decimal.
Nsei NSE identifier 0~65534
OrgPrmBoardNo Original active board

0~5, 10~15
No. of cell
OrgSlvBoardNo Original standby board

0~5, 10~15
No. of cell
BVCI BVC identifier, 2~65534
BSSID BSSID 0~254
Results

Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit cell add
See Also
cell set
cell show
cell del
Notes
1) NSEI must exist in NSE data.

2) Cell original active board and original standby board must be configured, and
their type must be "RPPU"
3) NSVC corresponding to the appointed NSE must be configured on the original
active board and original standby board.
Example
Add a cell and specify its CellID as 460052708000049, NSEI as 0, the No. of the
originally active and standby boards respectively as 0 and 1, BVCI as 16 and BSSID
as 15.
pcu(advanced)# cell add 460052708000049 0 0 1 16 15
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit cell del
cell del
Function
Delete the configuration of one or all cells.
Mode
Usage
cell del <CellID> | all
Options
CellID Cell identifier, 15 or 16 digits. The first 5 (in the case of

15 digits) or 6 (in the case of 16 digits)
is required to be in BCD, and the 10
digits followed be in decimal.
all Delete the configuration

of all cells.
Results

See Also
cell add
cell set
cell show
Example
Delete the cell whose CellID is 460052708000049.
pcu(advanced)# cell del 460052708000049
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit cell del
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit cell set
cell set
Function
Modify the attributes of a specified cell.
Mode
Usage
cell set <CellID> <NSEI> <OrgPrmBoardNo> <OrgSlvBoardNo>

<BVCI> <BSSID>
Options
CellID Cell identifier, 15 or 16 digits. The first 5 (in the case

of 15 digits) or 6 (in the case of 16
digits) is required to be in BCD, and
the 10 digits followed be in decimal.
Nsei NSE identifier 0~65534
CellPrimaryB The No. of the originally

active board of the cell 0~5, 10~15
oardNo
CellBackupB The No. of the originally

standby board of the cell 0~5, 10~15
oardNo
BVCI BVC identifier, 2~65534
BSSID BSSID 0~254
Results

See Also
cell add
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit cell set
cell show
cell del
Notes
1) NSEI must exist in NSE data.

2) Cell original active board and original standby board must be configured, and
their type must be "RPPU"
active board and original standby board.
Example
Modify the attributes of a cell with CellID as 460052708000049, NSEI as 0, the No.
of the originally active and standby boards respectively as 2 and 3, BVCI as 18 and
BSSID as 15.
pcu(advanced)# cell set 460052708000049 0 2 3 18 15
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit cell show
cell show
Function
Show the configuration of a cell or all cells.
Mode
Basic user mode, advanced user mode and super user mode.
Usage
cell show <CellID> | all
Options
CellID Cell identifier. 15 or 16 digits. The first 5 (in the case of

15 digits) or 6 (in the case of 16 digits) is
required to be in BCD, and the 10 digits
followed be in decimal.
all Show the configuration

of all cells.
Results
Success Show the configuration of a cell or all cells.

See Also
cell add
cell set
cell del
Example
Show the attributes of all cells.
pcu(super)#cell show all
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit cell show
3 record(s) satisfying condition in table cell
(a)CellID (b)NSEI (c)OrgPrmBoardNo (d)OrgSlvBoardNo
(e)PrimeBoardNo (f)SlaveBoardNo (g)BVCI (h)RAI
(i)LAI (j)BSSID
cell 0 :
(a)460332109010001 (b)10 (c)10 (d)10
(e)255 (f)255 (g)2 (h)46033210901
(i)460332109 (j)1
cell 1 :
(a)460332109010002 (b)10 (c)10 (d)10
(e)255 (f)255 (g)3 (h)46033210901
(i)460332109 (j)1
cell 2 :
(a)460332109010003 (b)10 (c)10 (d)10
(e)255 (f)255 (g)4 (h)46033210901
(i)460332109 (j)1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit download batch
download batch
Function
This command is used to download batch command file and execute the commands
in the file.
Mode
Advanced user mode, Super user mode
Usage
Download batch <FileName> <HostIPAddress>
Option
FileName batch file's name
HostIPAddress IP address of loader

Format: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
server
Results
Success Execute each command in the batch file

See Also
None
Notes
1) The loader program should be running, and the download directory should be set
correctly.
2) If POMU board and the loader program are not in the same sub-network, the
route information should be configured correctly in PCU.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit download batch
Example
pcu(super)#download batch om.txt 129.12.222.253
Downloading….
Download file succeeds
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit download config
download config
Function
This command is used to download configuration file to PCU.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
Download config <FileName> <HostIPAddress>
Option
FileName configuration file's name
HostIPAddress IP address of loader

server
Results
Success The configuration is downloaded to PCU and hint

information is displayed
See Also
pcu del alltable

download batch
Notes
1) The loader program should be running, and the download directory should be set
correctly
2) If POMU board and the loader program are not in same sub-network, the route
should be configured correctly in PCU
3) Before download new configuration, you can delete old configuration using
command "pcu del alltable"
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit download config
4) After downloading the new configuration, please execute "write" to save new the
new configuration
5) After save the new configuration, please execute "reboot" to take effect.
Example
pcu(super)#download config pcu.ini 129.12.222.253
Now, execute configuration script beginning....
Execute configuration script completed
If you want to check these modifications, please execute "show running-config"
If you want to save these modifications, please execute "write"
If you do not want to save, please execute "reboot".
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit download software
download software
Function
This command is used to download software to PCU and update the software of
standby POMU board, RPPU board, PMC or L2PU board.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
download software <FileName> <HostIPAddress> <BoardNo>
Option
FileName The software file name
HostIPAddress IP address of the loader

server
BoardNo 16 ~ 27, 36 ~ 47(PMC or

L2PU board)
The target board
number 0~5, 10~15(RPPU board)
6, 8(Slave POMU board)
Results
Success the software is saved in the Flash memory of target board

and the hint information is displayed
See Also
io version
io reset
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit download software
Notes
1) Please prudently use this command under the guidance of Huawei’s technical
support engineers or senior maintenance engineers of Huawei’s PCU facilities.
2) The loader program should be running, and set the download directory correctly
3) If POMU board and the loader program are not in the same sub-network, the
route information should be configured correctly in PCU.
4) To download software to standby POMU board, the standby POMU should run
normally.
5) To download software of RPPU board, first set the running version of RPPU to
"bios" using command "io version set", and then reset RPPU using command "io
reset". After downloading, first set the running version of RPPU to "max" using
command "io version set", and then reset RPPU using command "io reset".
6) To download software of L2PU/PMC, the corresponding RPPU board should run
normally
7) The BoardNo of RPPU corresponds to its relative slot number. The BoardNo of
L2PU =16+RPPU BoardNo*2+n. “n” is the number of L2PU at the RPPU. Its
lower number is 0 and the upper one is 1
Example
pcu(super)# download soft l2pu_lapd_rom.bin 129.12.222.99 46
Downloading************
L2PU/PMC board writing flash succeeds.
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit e1t1 add
e1t1 add
Function
This command is used to add E1 or T1 data.
Mode
Usage
e1t1 add <BoardNo> < PortNo> <GbLinkMode> <FrFormat>

<CodeClass> <FrameType> <ClockMode> <SlaveClkSel>
Options
This value differs according to

the type of L2PU board.
PortNo Port No.
0 ~ 3 : PMC
0 ~ 7 : L2PU
Link mode on Gb
GbLinkMode e1, t1
interface
FrFormat FR frame format pcm_30, pcm_31
CodeClass Code class hdb3, ami
FrameType Frame type pcm_df, crc4_mf
ClockMode Clock mode master, slave
This value differs according to

the type of L2PU board.
Select standby clock
SlaveClkSel
mode 0 ~ 1 : PMC
0 ~ 3 : L2PU
Results
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit e1t1 add
See Also
e1t1 set
e1t1 show
e1t1 del
Notes
BoardNo must exist in the slot table.
Example
Add E1 and specify its BoardNo as 0, PortNo as 0, GbLinkMode as E1, FrFormat as

pcm_30, CodeClass as hdb3, FrameType as crc4_mf, ClockMode as master,
SlaveClkSel is 1.
pcu(advanced)# e1t1 add 0 0 e1 pcm_30 hdb3 crc4_mf master 1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit e1t1 del
e1t1 del
Function
This command is used to delete one or all the E1 or T1 configuration.
Mode
Usage
e1t1 del {<BoardNo> <PortNo>} | all
Options
This value differs

according to the type of
L2PU board.
PortNo Port No.
0 ~ 3 : PMC
0 ~ 7 : L2PU
all Delete all the E1 or T1 data. None
Results

See Also
e1t1 add
e1t1 set
e1t1 show
Notes
None
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit e1t1 del
Example
Delete an E1 whose BoardNo is 0 and PortNo is 0.
pcu(advanced)# e1t1 del 0 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit elt1 set
e1t1 set
Function
This command is used to modify E1 or T1 data.
Mode
Usage
e1t1 set <BoardNo> <PortNo> <GbLinkMode> <FrFormat> <CodeClass>

<FrameType> <ClockMode> <SlaveClkSel>
Options
This value differs according

to the type of L2PU board.
PortNo Port No. 0~3-Fr

0~7-Mtp2
0~3-Lapd
GbLinkMode Link mode on Gb interface e1, t1
FrFormat FR frame format pcm_30, pcm_31
CodeClass Code class hdb3, ami
FrameType Frame type pcm_df, crc4_mf
ClockMode Clock mode master, slave
This value differs according

to the type of L2PU board.
SlaveClkSel Select standby clock mode
0 ~ 1 : PMC
0 ~ 3 : L2PU
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit elt1 set
Results

See Also
e1t1 add
e1t1 show
e1t1 del
Notes
BoardNo must exist in the slot table.
Example
Modify E1 data with BoardNo as 0, PortNo as 0, GbLinkMode as E1, FrFormat as

pcm_30, CodeClass as hdb3, FrameType as crc4_mf, ClockMode as master,
SlaveClkSel as 1.
pcu(advanced)# e1t1 set 0 0 e1 pcm_30 hdb3 crc4_mf master 1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit elt1 show
e1t1 show
Function
This command is used to show one or all the E1/T1 configuration.
Mode
Usage
e1t1 show {<BoardNo> <PortNo>}| all
Options
PortNo Port No. 0~3
all Show all the E1 or T1 data. None
Results

See Also
e1t1 add
e1t1 set
e1t1 del
Notes
None
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit elt1 show
Example
Show the configuration of the E1 whose BoardNo is 0 and PortNo is 0.
pcu(advanced)# e1t1 show 0 0
BoardNo :0
PortNo :0
GbLinkMode : E1
FrFormat : PCM_30
CodeClass : HDB3
FrameType : PCM_DF
ClockMode : slave
SlaveClkSel :0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit erase
erase
Function
This command is used to erase the configuration data in FLASH Memory.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
erase
Options
None.
Results
Success Information related

Failure Information related
See Also
write
Notes
Be cautious in using this command. We strongly recommended that this command

should be used under the direction of the Huawei’s technical engineer.
Example
Erase the configuration information in FLASH Memory.
pcu(super)# erase
This will erase the configuration in the flash memory.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit erase
The system configurations will be erased to reconfigure
Are you sure?[Y/N]y
Now erasing the configuration in flash memory.
Please wait for a while......
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit exec-timeout set
exec-timeout set
Function
This command is used to modify telnet auto disconnect time.
Mode
Usage
exec-timeout set <Length>
Options
Length The auto disconnect time(seconds) 60~22369621
Results

See Also
Exec-timeout show
Notes
None.
Example
Modify telnet auto disconnect time into 10 minutes.
pcu(super)# exec-timeout set 600
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit exec-timeout show
exec-timeout show
Function
This command is used to inquery telnet auto disconnect time.
Mode
Usage
exec-timeout show
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the time length that telnet will auto disconnect.
See Also
Exec-timeout set
Notes
None.
Example
Inquery telnet auto disconnect time.
pcu(super)# exec-timeout show
Auto disconnect time: 600 seconds
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit exit
exit
Function
This command is used to exit from present operation mode to normal user mode or
disconnect the telnet if it is in normal user mode.
Mode
Normal user mode, basic user mode, advanced user mode, super user mode
Usage
exit
Options
None.
Results
Success The prompt changed or the telnet disconnected
Failure Information related
See Also
None.
Notes
None.
Example
Exit from advanced maintenance mode to normal user mode.
pcu(advanced)# exit
pcu>
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit help
help
Function
This command is used to acquire help information.
Mode
Normal user mode
Usage
help
Options
None.
Results
Success Show related help information
See Also
None.
Notes
PCU MML offers on-line help. With the command “help”, the user can get the
information from the help system, which includes full help or part help. The user can
also enter “?” to get on-line help on any occasions.
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit hostname
hostname
Function
This command is used to modify hostname.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
hostname <HostName>
Option
Hostname Hostname
Results

See Also
None.
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the hostname to pcu106.
pcu(super)#hostname pcu106
pcu106(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit io reset
io reset
Function
This command is used to reset specified RPPU board.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
Io reset <BoardNo>
Options
BoardNo The number of RPPU board 0~5, 10~15
Results

See Also
io version
Notes
None.
Example
Reset the No.15 RPPU board.
pcu(super)# io reset 15
WARNING: Operation will reset the board! Continue ?[Y/N]y
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit io reset
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit io version set
io version set
Function
This command is used to modify RPPU flag.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
io version set <BoardNo> <Flag>
Options
BoardNo No. of RPPU board 0~5, 10~15
Flag The flag of the RPPU board max, bios
Results

See Also
io version show
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit io version set
Example
Modify the flag of No.1 RPPU board to max.
pcu(super)# io version set 1 max
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit io version show
io version show
Function
This command is used to show the flag of RPPU board.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
io version show <BoardNo>
Options
BoardNo The No. of RPPU board 0~5, 10~15
Results

See Also
io version set
Notes
None.
Example
Show the flag of the No. 1 RPPU board.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit io version show
pcu(super)# io version show
flag: max version
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ipaddress add
ipaddress add
Function
This command is used to add an IP address.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
ipaddress add <IpAddress> <IpMask>[Slave]
Options
IpAddress IP address Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IpMask Subnet mask Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Slave If you ignore this parameter, this address

Slave address
will become master IP address
Returned Result
Succeed Operation successful

See Also
Ipaddress set
Ipaddress del
Ipaddress show
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ipaddress add
Example
Add the active IP address as 129.12.222.124, and specify its subnet mask as
255.255.0.0.
pcu(super)# ipaddress add 129.12.222.124 255.255.0.0
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ipaddress del
ipaddress del
Function
This command is used to delete an IP address.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
ipaddress del <IpAddress> <IpMask>
Options
IpAddress IP address Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IpMask Subnet mask Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Returned Result

See Also
ipaddress add
ipaddress set
ipaddress show
Notes
None.
Example
Delete the IP address of 129.12.222.127 whose subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ipaddress del
pcu(super)# ipaddress del 129.12.222.127 255.255.0.0
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ipaddress set
ipaddress set
Function
This command is used to modify the IP address.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
ipaddress set <OldIPAddress> <OldIpMask> <IpAddress> <IpMask>

[Slave]
Options
OldIPAddress Old IP address Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
OldIpMask Old subnet mask Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IpAddress New IP address Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IpMask New subnet mask Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Slave If you ignore this parameter, this

Standby IP address address will become master IP
address
Returned Result

See Also
ipaddress add
ipaddress show
ipaddress del
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ipaddress set
Notes
Only one active IP address is allowed the system.
Example
Modify the IP address from 129.12.222.127 to 129.12.222.128, and the subnet mask
keeps the same (255.255.0.0), this IP address should be used as active IP address.
pcu (super)#ipaddress set 129.12.222.127 255.255.0.0 129.12.222.128 255.255.0.0
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ipaddress show
ipaddress show
Function
This command is used to inquire all the effective IP address.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
ipaddress show
Options
None.
Returned Result
Succeed Show the information related

See Also
ipaddress add
ipaddress set
ipaddress del
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the information of IP address.
pcu(super)# ipaddress show
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ipaddress show
IP address subnet mask address type
129.12.230.107 255.255.0.0 master
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit language
language
Function
This command is used to switch language mode between English and Chinese.
Mode
Normal user mode, basic user mode, advanced user mode, super user mode
Usage
language
Options
None.
Results
See Also
None.
Notes
The default language mode of PCU MML is English.
Example
Change the language mode of PCU MMl from English to Chinese.
pcu(advanced)# language
Current language: English
Do you want to change the language mode? (Y/N)y
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit language
Language mode has been changed.
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit log browse
log browse
Function
This command is used to browse system log information.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
log browse [LogDate]
Option
LogDate Date when logs are

Format: YYYY/MM/DD
generated
Results
Success Display related information

See Also
log disable
log enable
log state
Notes
None.
Example
Browse the log generated on January 24, 2003.
pcu(super)#log browse 2003/01/24
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit log browse
This operation may take long time, please wait...
2003/01/24 11:11:58 129.12.222.226 Normal
su
2003/01/24 11:12:03 129.12.222.226 Supervisor
supervisor slot show all
2003/01/24 11:12:10 129.12.222.226 Supervisor
supervisor exi
2003/01/24 11:12:11 129.12.222.226 Normal
exi
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit log disable
log disable
Function
This command is used to disable command line log.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
log disable
Option
None
Results
Success Disable the command line log function
See Also
log enable
Notes
None.
Example
Disable the command line log .
pcu(super)#log disable
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit log enable
log enable
Function
This command is used to enable command line log.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
log enable
Option
None
Results
Success Enable the command line log function
See Also
log disable
Notes
None.
Example
Enable the command line log .
pcu(super)#log enable
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit log state
log state
Function
This command is used to Show state of command line log.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
log state
Option
None
Results
Success Show the current state of the command line log function
See Also
log browse
Notes
None.
Example
Show the state of command line log
pcu(super)#log state
Command line log state: disable
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ms browse
ms browse
Function
This command is used to browse the result of performance measurement.
Mode
Basic user mode, Advanced user mode, Super user mode
Usage
ms browse <TaskNo> <BeginDate> <BeginTime> <EndDate>

<EndTime>
Options
Taskno The No of task. 0~79
BeginDate The start date of inquiry result, format : YYYY/MM/DD
BeginTime The start time of inquiry

format : HH:MM
range.
EndDate The end date of inquiry result. format : YYYY/MM/DD
EndTime The end time of inquiry result. format : HH:MM
Results
Success Show the result of the performance data measurement.

See Also
ms inquire
Notes
1) The displayed measurement result is the outcome of measurement period to

which the designated date and time go.
2) “----“ in the displayed result indicates null data.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ms browse
3) This command can only display results of maximum 300 periods.
Example
Browse the performance measurement result of No. 0 Task from 9:30 to 10:00 on Jan
22, 2003.
pcu(advanced)#ms browse 0 2003/01/22 9:30 2003/01/22 10:00
PeriodNo =4707 , Date = 2003/01/22 , Time = 09:30
Board 6:
(581) 3 (582) 19
Board 6:
(581) 4 (582) 19
Board 6:
(581) 4 (582) 19
Board 6:
(581) 3 (582) 19
Board 6:
(581) 4 (582) 17
Board 6:
(581) 3 (582) 18
--- 6 periods of measurement results displayed ---
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ms inquire
ms inquire
Function
This command is used to display basic information about the task.
Mode
Usage
ms inquire <TaskNo>|all
Options
Taskno The No of task 0~79
all Query all the task created None.
Results
Success Show detail information on the task created

See Also
ms browse
Notes
This command can display all Task No, task start time and end time, and parameter
information of all tasks including the registered ones.
Example
Inquire the information on Task 0.
pcu(advanced)# ms inquire 0
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ms inquire
Task ID 0
Task name task_0
Task status running
Task start date 2003/01/06
Task end date semi-permanent period
Task measurement segment 00:00 - 23:55
Task measurement period 5minute(s)
Task time type Statistics by day
Task measurement type cpu
Board :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
-------- 1 tasks displayed --------
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ms rename
ms rename
Function
This command is used to modify the name of the performance measurement task.
Mode
Usage
ms rename <TaskNo> <TaskName>
Options
Taskno The No of task 0~79
TaskName New name of the task None.
Results

See Also
None.
Notes
Parameter TaskName should not include space.
Example
Modify the name of task 0 to cpumeas.
pcu(supervisor)#ms rename 0 cpumeas
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ms rename
pcu(supervisor)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc ptp block
mt bvc ptp block
Function
This command is used to block PTP BVC.
Mode
Usage
mt bvc ptp block <NSEI> <BVCI>
Options
<NSEI> Network service entity

0~65534
identifier
<BVCI> BSSGP virtual connection

0~65534
identifier
Results

See Also
mt bvc ptp reset

mt bvc ptp show state
mt bvc ptp unblock
Notes
NSEI and BVCI must have been configured in database, and a correlation must have
been established between them.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc ptp block
Example
Bolck the PTP BVC whose NSEI is 40 and BVCI is 2.
pcu(advanced)# mt bvc ptp block 40 2
WARNING: Operation will block the PTP BVC, and stop its services until it is unblocked!
Continue ?[Y/N]y
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc ptp reset
mt bvc ptp reset
Function
This command is used to reset PTP BVC.
Mode
Usage
mt bvc ptp reset <NSEI> <BVCI>
Options
<NSEI> Network service entity identifier 0~65534
<BVCI> BSSGP virtual connection

0~65534
identifier
Results

See Also
mt bvc ptp block

mt bvc ptp unblock
Notes
NSEI and BVCI must have been configured in database, and a correlation must have
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc ptp reset
Example
Reset the PTP BVC whose NSEI is 40 and BVCI is 2.
pcu(advanced)# mt bvc ptp reset 40 2
WARNING: Operation will reset the PTP BVC, and stop its services until the reset
succeeds! Continue ?[Y/N]y
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc ptp show state
Function
This command is used to inquire the state of PTP BVC.
Mode
Usage
mt bvc ptp show state <NSEI> {<BVCI>|all}
Options
NSEI Network service entity identifier 0~65534
BVCI BSSGP virtual connection identifier 0~65534
all Input "all" to inquire the state of all

PTP BVC of specified NSE
Results
Success Show the status of PTP BVC

See Also
mt bvc ptp block

mt bvc ptp reset
mt bvc ptp unblock
Notes
NSEI and NSVCI must have been configured in database, and a correlation must have
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc ptp show state
Example
Query the state of PTP BVC whose NSEI is 40 and BVCI is 2.
pcu(advanced)# mt bvc ptp show state 40 2
NSEI: 40
BVCI: 2
PTP BVC STATE: Normal
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc ptp unblock
mt bvc ptp unblock
Function
This command is used to unblock PTP BVC.
Mode
Usage
mt bvc ptp unblock <NSEI> <BVCI>
Options
BVCI BSSGP virtual connection

0~65534
identifier
Results

See Also
mt bvc ptp block

mt bvc ptp reset
Notes
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc ptp unblock
Example
Unblock the PTP BVC whose NSEI is 40 and BVCI is 2.
pcu(advanced)# mt bvc ptp unblock 40 2
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc signal reset
mt bvc signal reset
Function
This command is used to reset SIGNAL BVC.
Mode
Usage
mt bvc signal reset <NSEI>
Options
<NSEI> Network service entity

0~65534
identifier
Results

See Also
mt bvc signal show state

mt bvc signal switch
Notes
None.
Example
Reset the SIGNAL BVC whose NSEI is 250.
pcu(advanced)# mt bvc signal reset 250
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc signal reset
WARNING: Operation will reset the SIG BVC, and stops the services of the PTP BVC
under the NSE until the reset succeeds! Continue ?[Y/N]y
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc signal show state
mt bvc signal show state
Function
This command is used to inquire the stateof SIG BVC.
Mode
Usage
mt bvc signal show state <NSEI>
Options
<NSEI> Network service entity identifier 0~65534
Results
Success Show information related

See Also
mt bvc signal reset
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the state of SIGNAL BVC whose NSEI is 250.
pcu(advanced)# mt bvc signal show state 250
NSEI: 250
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt bvc signal show state
SIG BVC STATE: Normal
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt cpu show
mt cpu show
Function
This command is used to inquire CPU occupancy of specified board.
Mode
Usage
mt cpu show {<BoardNo0> [BoardNo1]....}|all
Options
BoardNo0 The Board No. 0~6, 8, 10~15
BoardNo1 The Board No. 0~6, 8, 10~15
all All the board None
Results
Success Show the CPU usage of the board quered

See Also
None.
Notes
Several board No.s (14 at most) can be entered each time to query the occupancy of
CPU simultaneously.
Example
Inquire the CPU occupancy of the No. 2 RPPU board.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt cpu show
pcu(advanced)# mt cpu show 2
RPPU: 2 CPU: 70%
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt disk fault clear
mt disk fault clear
Function
This command is used to clear fault information about the harddisk of specified POMU
board.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
mt disk fault clear <BoardNo>
Options
BoardNo POMU board No. 6, 8
Results

See Also
mt disk fault show
Notes
None.
Example
Clear the disk fault information about the harddisk of POMU 6.
pcu(super)# mt disk fault clear 6
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt disk fault clear
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt disk fault show
mt disk fault show
Function
This command is used to inquire fault information about the harddisk of specified
POMU board.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
mt disk fault show <BoardNo>
Options
Results

See Also
mt disk fault clear
Notes
None.
Example
Show the disk fault information about the harddisk of POMU 6.
pcu(super)#mt disk fault show 6
Partition /hda0
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt disk fault show
Harddisk fault times : 0
The time of first fault : 00/00/00 00:00:00
The time of last fault : 00/00/00 00:00:00
Partition /hda1
Partition /hda2
Partition /hda3
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt disk format
mt disk format
Function
This command is used to format the specified partition of specified harddisk.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
mt disk format <BoardNo> <PartitionName>
Options
PartitionName "/hda0", "/hda1",

Partition name
"/hda2", "/hda3",
Results

See Also
mt disk partition
Notes
1) This command is valid only for standby POMU
2) All data in the specified partition will be lost
3) The standby POMU should be reset after format
Example
Format the disk partition hda0 of standby POMU borad 6.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt disk format
pcu(super)#mt disk format 6 /hda0
WARNING: Operation will format harddisk, and all data in the partition to be formatted
will be lost! Continue? [Y/N]
Please execute \"slot power\" to reset standby POMU
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt disk partition
mt disk partition
Function
This command is used to partition the specified harddisk.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
mt disk partition <BoardNo>
Options
Results

See Also
mt disk format
Notes
1) This command is used to partition the specified harddisk; the default size of each
partition is as follows:
/hda0, 5%
/hda1, 50%
/hda2, 20%
/hda3, 25%
2) This command is valid only for standby POMU
3) All data in harddisk will be lost
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt disk partition
4) The harddisk will be formatted automatically after partition
5) The standby POMU should be reset after partition
Example
Partition the harddisk of standby POMU borad 6.
pcu(super)#mt disk partition 6
WARNING: Operation will partition harddisk, and all data in the harddisk will be lost!
Continue? [Y/N]
Please execute \"slot power\" to reset standby POMU
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt disk show
mt disk show
Function
This command is used to inquire information about the harddisk of specified POMU
board.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
mt disk show <BoardNo>
Options
Results

See Also
mt disk format
Notes
None
Example
Inquire information about the harddisk of POMU borad 6.
pcu(super)#mt disk show 6
Name Status Size(MB) Used(MB) Free(MB)
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt disk show
/hda0 normal 306 0 306
/hda1 normal 3068 945 2123
/hda2 normal 1227 103 1124
/hda3 normal 1534 96 1438
Total 6135 1144 4991
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr bc block
mt fr bc block
Function
This command is used to block specified BC.
Mode
Usage
mt fr bc block <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID>
Options
BoardNo The RPPU board No. 0~5, 10~15
LocalNo The No. of port on RPPU board 0~3
BCID The No. of bearer channel on port 0~30
Results

See Also
mt fr bc unblock
mt fr bc clear bcinfo
mt fr bc show statinfo
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr bc block
Example
Block the BC whose BoardNo is 2, LocalNo is 1 and BCID is 5.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr bc block 2 1 5
WARNING: Operation will block the BC and stop its services until it is unblocked!
Continue ?[Y/N]y
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr bc clear bcinfo
Function
This command is used to clear BC information.
Mode
Usage
mt fr bc clear bcinfo <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID>
Options
Results

See Also
mt fr bc block
mt fr bc unblock
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr bc clear bcinfo
Example
Clear the information of specified BC whose BoardNo is 2, LocalNo is 1 and BCID is 5.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr bc clear bcinfo 2 1 5
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr bc show statinfo
Function
This command is used for BC information measurement
Mode
Usage
mt fr bc show statinfo {<BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID>} | all
Options
BCID The No. of bearer channel on

0~30
port
all Input "all" to inquire statistic

information of all BC
Results

See Also
mt fr bc block
mt fr bc unblock
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr bc show statinfo
Example
Inquire the information of specific BC whose BoardNo is 0, LocalNo is 0 and BCID is 0.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr bc show statinfo 0 0 0
BoardNo: 0 LocalNo: 0 BCID: 0
BC state : Q933 valid,
not blocked by user
Number of PVCs activated :2
Time elapsed since last clear or BC recreation : 85341 seconds
Error of signalling link reliability at user side : 101
Errors of signalling protocol in band at user side :0
Times of channels declared inactive at user side :8
Errors of signalling link reliability at net side :0
Errors of signalling protocol in band at net side :0
Times of channels declared inactive at net side :0
Number of packets sent : 34370
Number of bytes sent : 531195
Number of packets sent successfully : 34364
Number of bytes sent successfully : 531101
Number of legal packets received : 23344
Number of bytes of legal data received : 322286
Number of illegal packets received : 14
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr bc unblock
mt fr bc unblock
Function
This command is used to unblock specified BC.
Mode
Usage
mt fr bc unblock <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID>
Options
Results

See Also
mt fr bc block
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr bc unblock
Example
Unbolck the specified BC whose BoardNo is 2, LocalNo is 1 and BCID is 5.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr bc unblock 2 1 5
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr pmc reset
mt fr pmc reset
Function
This command is used to reset the specified PMC/L2PU board for Gb interface.
Mode
Usage
mt fr pmc reset <BoardNo> <PMCNo>
Options
BoardNo RPPU board No. 0~5, 10~15
<PMCNo> The No. of PMC or L2PU on

0, 1
RPPU board
Results

See Also
None.
Notes
None.
Example
Reset the No.1 L2PU board on No.15 RPPU board which used in Gb interface.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr pmc reset 15 1
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr pmc reset
WARNING: Operation will reset the PMC, and stop its services until the reset succeeds!
Continue ?[Y/N]y
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr port reset
mt fr port reset
Function
This command is used to reset port of PMCFR
Mode
Usage
mt fr port reset <BoardNo> <PortNo>
Options
PortNo External Gb E1 port No. 0~3
Results

See Also
mt fr port show loop

mt fr port start loop
mt fr port stop loop
Notes
This command only support reset the port of PMCFR and doesn’t support reset the port
of L2PUFR. The RPPU used as Gb interfacewhich install PMCFR has 4 ports (each
PMC has 2). Their numbers are 0, 1, 2 and 3 from bottom to top.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr port reset
Example
Reset the No. 0 port in the No.2 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr port reset 2 0
WARNING: Operation will reset the PMC port, and stop its services until the reset
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr port show loop
Function
This command is used to inquire port loop information.
Mode
Usage
mt fr port show loop <BoardNo> < <PortNo> >
Options
PortNo 0 ~ 3 for PMC

External Gb E1 port No.
0 ~ 7 for L2PU
Results

See Also
mt fr port reset
Notes
The RPPU used as Gb interface has 4 ports or 8 ports(each PMC has 2 and each L2PU
has 4). Their numbers are 0, 1, 2 and 3 from bottom to top.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr port show loop
Example
Inquire the loop information of No.0 port which is in the No.2 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr port show loop 2 0
Near loop
Loop finished
Number of lost packets in loop : 0
Number of error packets in loop : 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr port start loop
Function
This command is used to start port loop operation.
Mode
Usage
<BoardNo> < PortNo > < LoopMode > <PacketNum>

<PacketLength>
Options
0 ~ 3 for PMC
PortNo External Gb E1 port No.
0 ~ 7 for L2PU
1~3
Local end loop
LoopMode Loop mode
Peer end loop
Auxiliary loop at peer end
PacketNum No. of loop packet
PacketLength Loop packet length 2~1600
Results

See Also
mt fr port reset
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr port start loop
Notes
To start "peer end loop", the cooperation of the other side of the loop is necessary.
Before starting "peer end loop" at this side, "auxiliary loop at peer end" at the other side
should first be started. When loop is finished the other side should first stop "auxiliary
loop at peer end", then the local end, as the sender, will recover automatically.
Example
Start the port loop-back of local end, the port is the No.0 in No.2 RPPU board, ten
packets with the length of ten bytes are used to test.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr port start loop 2 0 1 10 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr port stop loop
Function
This command is used to stop port loop-back.
Mode
Usage
mt fr port stop loop <BoardNo> < PortNo > < LoopMode >
Options
0 ~ 3 for PMC
PortNo No. of port on RPPU board
0 ~ 7 for L2PU
1~3
Local end loop
LoopMode Loop mode
Peer end loop
Auxiliary loop at peer end
Results

See Also
mt fr port reset
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr port stop loop
Notes
Before stopping loop-back, make sure that a loop-back test has been carried out
already
Example
Stop local end loop on the No.0 port which is on No.2 RPPU board
pcu(advanced)# mt fr port stop loop 2 0 1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr pvc active
mt fr pvc active
Function
This command is used to activate PVC.
Mode
Usage
mt fr pvc active <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID> <DLCI>
Options
LocalNo No. of port on RPPU board 0~3
BCID No. of bearer channel on port 0~30
DLCI Data link connection identifier
Results

See Also
mt fr pvc deactive
mt fr pvc clear pvcinfo
mt fr pvc show stateinfo
Notes
1) The operated BC must exist in the BC configuration table.

2) The operated DLCI must exist in the NSVC configuration table.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr pvc active
Example
Activate the PVC on No. 0 port No. 2 RPPU board, whose BCID is 1 and DLCI is 23.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr pvc active 2 0 1 23
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr pvc clear pvcinfo
Function
This command is used to Clear PVC information.
Mode
Usage
mt fr pvc clear pvcinfo <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID> <DLCI>
Options
Results

See Also
mt fr pvc active
mt fr pvc deactive
Notes
To clear PVC information:

1) RPPU must be correclty configured and able to communicate with POMU correctly,
and
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr pvc clear pvcinfo
2) The connection between the maintenance console and the POMU of
corresponding PCU system has been correctly established, and
3) The designated board number must be valid RPPU board number, and
Example
Clear the PVC information in No. 0 port No. 2 RPPU board, whose BCID is 1 and DLCI
is 23.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr pvc clear pvcinfo 2 0 1 23
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr pvc deactive
mt fr pvc deactive
Function
This command is used to deactivate PVC.
Mode
Usage
mt fr pvc deactive <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID> <DLCI>
Options
Results

See Also
mt fr pvc active
Notes
To successfully activate PVC,

and
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr pvc deactive
corresponding PCU system has been correctly established, and
3) The designated board number must be valid protocol processing board number,
and
5) The operated DLCI must exist in the NSVC configuration table.
Example
Deactivate the PVC on No.0 port No.2 RPPU board. The BCID is 1 and DLCI is 23.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr pvc deactive 2 0 1 23
WARNING: Operation will deactivate the PVC, and stop its services until it is
re-activated! Continue ?[Y/N]y
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr pvc show stateinfo
Function
This command is used to inquire PVC status.
Mode
Basic user mode, Advanced user mode, super user mode
Usage
mt fr pvc show stateinfo <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCID> <DLCI>
Options
DLCI Data link connection

identifier
Results
Success Show the related PVC information

See Also
mt fr pvc active
mt fr pvc deactive
Notes
To successfully query PVC,
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt fr pvc show stateinfo
and
corresponding PCU system has beencorrectly established, and
3) The designated board number must be valid RPPU board number, and
Example
To Inquire the PVC status which is on No.3 port of the No.10 RPPU board. The BCID is
1, DLCI is 107.
pcu(advanced)# mt fr pvc show stateinfo 10 3 1 107
PVC state : Q933 valid,
not blocked by user
Time elapsed since last clear or BC recreation : 85604 seconds
Number of bytes sent : 419365
Number of packets sent successfully : 26090
Number of bytes sent successfully : 419271
Number of legal packets received : 22928
Number of bytes of legal data received : 320545
Number of illegal packets received :0
Number of packets with BECN flag :0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell active
mt gcell active
Function
This command is used to activate GPRS cell.
Mode
Usage
mt gcell active {<BoardNo> all}| <LCNo> | <LCName>
Options
all Input "all" to activate all cells whose

primary RPPU board is the specified
RPPU board
LCNo The No. of logical cell 0~65534
LCName The name of logical cell, string, case

insensitive
Results

See Also
mt gcell block
mt gcell reset
mt gcell send psi
mt gcell show cgi
mt gcell show state
mt gcell unblock
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell active
mt gcell deactive
mt gcell show available
mt gcell show unavailable
mt gcell show attr
Notes
None.
Example
Activate the No.3 GPRS cell.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell active 3
This operation takes time, waiting .....
Active cell 3 successfully
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell block
mt gcell block
Function
This command is used to block specified GPRS cell.
Mode
Usage
mt gcell block {<BoardNo> all}| <LCNo> | <LCName>
Options
BoardNo0 RPPU board No. 0~5, 10~15
all Block all the cell at the same

None
board.
LCName The name of logical cell, string,

case insensitive
Results

See Also
mt gcell reset
mt gcell send psi
mt gcell show state
mt gcell unblock
mt gcell show cgi
mt gcell active
mt gcell deactive
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell block
mt gcell show attr
Notes
None.
Example
Bolck No.6 GPRS cell.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell block 6
WARNING: Operation will block the cell, and stop its services until it is unblocked!
Continue ?[Y/N]y
RPPU: 4
Cell: 6
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell deactive
mt gcell deactive
Function
This command is used to deactivate GPRS cell.
Mode
Usage
mt gcell deactive {<BoardNo> all}|<LCNo>|<LCName>
Options
Input "all" to deactivate all cells

all whose primary RPPU board is the
specified RPPU board

insensitive
Results

See Also
mt gcell reset
mt gcell send psi
mt gcell show state
mt gcell unblock
mt gcell show cgi
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell deactive
mt gcell active
mt gcell show attr
Notes
None.
Example
Deactivate No.3 GPRS cell.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell deactive 3
WARNING: Operation will deactivate the cell, and stop its services until it is re-activated!
Continue ?[Y/N]y
This operation takes time, waiting .....
Deactivate cell 3 successfully
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell reset
mt gcell reset
Function
This command is used to reset GPRS cell.
Mode
Usage
mt gcell reset {<BoardNo> all}|<LCNo> | <LCName>
Options
BoardNo RPPU board No. 0~5,10~15
all Input "all" to maintain all cells of

specified board
LCName The name of logical cell, string,

case insensitive
Results

See Also
mt gcell block
mt gcell send psi
mt gcell show state
mt gcell show cgi
mt gcell unblock
mt gcell active
mt gcell deactive
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell reset
mt gcell show attr
Notes
None.
Example
Reset No.6 GPRS cell.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell reset 6
WARNING: Operation will reset the cell, and stop its services until the reset succeeds!
Continue ?[Y/N]
RPPU :4
cell :6
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell send psi
mt gcell send psi
Function
This command is used to send GPRS packet system information by force.
Mode
Usage
mt gcell send psi <LCNo>|<LCName>
Options
LCName The name of logical cell,

string, case insensitive
Results

See Also
mt gcell block
mt gcell reset
mt gcell show state
mt gcell show cgi
mt gcell unblock
mt gcell active
mt gcell deactive
mt gcell show attr
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell send psi
Notes
None.
Example
Force to send system information in cell 6.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell send psi 6
RPPU : 13
Cell :6
Psi1 number :0
Psi2 number :0
Psi3 number :0
Psi3bis number : 0
Psi4 number :0
Psi5 number :0
Psi13 number : 1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell show attr
mt gcell show attr
Function
This command is used to inquire cell timeslot attribute.
Mode
Usage
mt gcell show attr {<BoardNo> all} | <LCNo> | <LCName>
Options
BoardNo RPPU board No. 0 ~ 5, 10 ~ 15
all Input "all" to maintain all

cells of specified board

Results
Success Operation successful, and show the information

related
See Also
mt gcell block
mt gcell reset
mt gcell send psi
mt gcell show state
mt gcell show list
mt gcell unblock
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell show attr
mt gcell active
mt gcell deactive
mt gcell show cgi
Notes
The timeslot attribute of a logical cell can be normal cell, single timeslot extended cell or
double timeslot extended cell.
Example
Inquire the timeslot attribute of cells on the No.2 RPPU board.
pcu (advanced)#mt gcell show attr 2 all
1 cell(s) processed
RPPU :2
Cell :4
LCell Timeslot Type : Normal Cell
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell show available
Function
This command is used to inquire the available cell.
Mode
Usage
{<BSCNo> all} | {<BSCName> all} | <BoardNo> |

all
Options
BSCNo BSC No. 0~254
BSCName Name of BSC, string, case

insensitive
all Input "all" to inquire all

available logical cell of
whole PCU
Input "all" after <BSCNo> or
<BSCName> to inquire all
available logical cell of
specified BSC
Results

related
See Also
mt gcell block
mt gcell reset
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell show available
mt gcell send psi
mt gcell show state
mt gcell show list
mt gcell unblock
mt gcell active
mt gcell deactive
mt gcell show cgi
mt gcell show attr
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the available cells on the No.3 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell show available 3
2 cell(s) available
RPPU :3
Cell : 100
RPPU :3
Cell : 101
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell show cgi
mt gcell show cgi
Function
This command is used to inquire the CGI of the cell.
Mode
Usage
mt gcell show cgi {<BoardNo> all}|<LCNo> | <LCName>
Options
all Show the CGI of all the cell at the same

None
board
LCNo The No. of logical cell. 0~65534

insensitive
Results
Success Operation successful, and show the information related

See Also
mt gcell block
mt gcell reset
mt gcell send psi
mt gcell show state
mt gcell show list
mt gcell unblock
mt gcell active
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell show cgi
mt gcell deactive
mt gcell show attr
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the CGI of No.6 cell.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell show cgi 6
Cell: 6 CGI: 4600525220008
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell show state
mt gcell show state
Function
This command is used to inquire the status of specified cell.
Mode
Usage
mt gcell show state {<BoardNo> all}|<LCNo> | <LCName>
Options
all Show the CGI of all the cell at the

None
same board

insensitive
Results
Success Operation successful and show the information related

See Also
mt gcell block
mt gcell reset
mt gcell send psi
mt gcell show cgi
mt gcell unblock
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell show state
mt gcell active
mt gcell deactive
mt gcell show attr
Notes
None.
Example
To Inquire the state of all the GPRS cells configed on the No 3 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell show state 3 all
2 cell(s) processed
RPPU :2
Cell :4
Operation state : enabled
Availability state : no exception
BSC management state : unblocked
Cause of BSC being blocked : unknown
Management state of maintenance : unblocked
Management state of Gb : unblocked
RPPU :3
Cell : 100
Cause : cell is deactive
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell show unavailable
Function
This command is used to inquire the unavailable cell.
Mode
Usage
{<BSCNo> all} | {<BSCName> all} | <BoardNo>

| all
Options
BSCNo BSC No. 0~254

insensitive
all Input "all" to inquire all available

logical cell of whole PCU
available logical cell of specified
BSC
Results

related
See Also
mt gcell block
mt gcell reset
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell show unavailable
mt gcell send psi
mt gcell show state
mt gcell show list
mt gcell unblock
mt gcell active
mt gcell deactive
mt gcell show cgi
mt gcell show attr
Notes
This command is used to inquire unavailable cell list and its state of specified BSC,
RPPU board or whole PCU
Example
Inquire the unavailable cells on the No.3 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell show unavailable 3
1 cell(s) unavailable
RPPU :3
Cell : 100
Management state of maintenance : blocked
Management state of Gb : unblocked
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell unblock
mt gcell unblock
Function
This command is used to unblock specified GPRS cell.
Mode
Usage
mt gcell unblock {<BoardNo> all}| <LCNo> | <LCName>
Options
all Show the CGI of all the cell at the same

None
board

insensitive
Results

See Also
mt gcell block
mt gcell reset
mt gcell send psi
mt gcell show cgi
mt gcell show state
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt gcell unblock
mt gcell active
mt gcell deactive
mt gcell show attr
Notes
None.
Example
Unblock the No.6 GPRS cell.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell unblock 6
RPPU :4
Cell :6
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd block
mt lapd block
Function
This command is used to block LAPD.
Mode
Usage
mt lapd block {<BoardNo> all}|<LapdNo> | <LAPDName>
Options
all Input "all" to maintain all LAPDs of

specified board
LapdNo The The No. of LAPD link 0~254
LAPDName The name of LAPD link, string, case

insensitive
Results

See Also
mt lapd show state

mt lapd show available
mt lapd show unavailable
mt lapd unblock
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd block
Notes
None.
Example
Block the No.3 LAPD link.
pcu(advanced)# mt lapd block 3
WARNING: If the LAPD is the only one between PCU and BSC, the operation will
cause the cell GPRS unavailable until it is unblocked! Continue ?[Y/N]y
RPPU :4
LAPD :3
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd loop set
mt lapd loop set
Function
This command is used to set the loop mode of specified LAPD link.
Mode
Usage
mt lapd loop set {<LapdNo>|<LapdName>} <LoopMode>
Options
LapdNo The No. of LAPD link 0~254
LapdName The Name of LAPD link, string, case

insensitive
LoopMode NoLoop
Loop mode of LAPD link
FromE1Line
Results

See Also
mt lapd loop show
Notes
To check the data configuration and hardware of PCU, you can connect the TX and RX
of the E1 and set the LAPD link mode to “FromE1Line”, and then check the state of
LAPD, the state of LAPD should be enable. After checking, you should set the loop
mode of LAPD to “NoLoop”
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd loop set
Example
Set the loop mode of LAPD link 2 to “FromE1Line”.
pcu(advanced)#mt lapd loop set 2 frome1line
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd loop show
mt lapd loop show
Function
This command is used to inquire the loop mode of specified LAPD link.
Mode
Usage
mt lapd loop show {<LapdNo>|<LapdName>}
Options
LapdName The Name of LAPD link, string, case

insensitive
Results

See Also
mt lapd loop set
Notes
None
Example
Show the loop mode of LAPD link 2 .
pcu(advanced)#mt lapd loop show 2
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd loop show
RPPU :2
LapdNo :2
LoopMode : no Loop
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd port loop set
mt lapd port loop set
Function
This command is used to set the loop state of specified ports on specified L2PU board.
Mode
Usage
mt lapd prot loop set <BoardNo> <PortNo> <LoopMode>
Options
PortNo Pb Port No. 0~7
"NoLoop"
LoopMode LAPD port loop mode "LLoopBack"
"REchoOff"
Results

See Also
mt lapd port show state
Notes
1) This command is used to test the E1 link between PCU and BSC, the meaning of
loop mode is:
"NoLoop" normal state, no loop
"LLoopBack" local loop back
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd port loop set
"REchoOff" remote echo off
2) Each PB RPPU has 8 E1 port, and the PortNo is 0 to 7 from bottom to top
Example
Set the loop mode of port 0 on RPPU 0 .
pcu(advanced)#mt lapd port loop set 0 0 LLoopBack
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd port show state
mt lapd port show state
Function
This command is used to inquire the state of all ports on specified L2PU board.
Mode
Usage
mt lapd prot show state <BoardNo> <L2PUNo>
Options
L2PUNo The No. of L2PU on RPPU board 0~1
Results
Success the state of all ports on specified L2PU board

See Also
mt lapd port loop set
Notes
Each PB RPPU has 2 L2PU board, and the L2PUNo is 0 to 1 from bottom to top
Example
Show the port state of all ports on L2PU 0 on RPPU 0 .
pcu(advanced)#mt lapd port show state 0 0
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd port show state
4 ports(s) processed
RPPU :0
PortNo :0
Configuration : yes
Local State : synchronous
Remote State : synchronous
Loop State : local loop back
Clock Source : no
RPPU :0
PortNo :1
Configuration : no
Local State : not synchronous
Remote State : unknown
Loop State : no loop
Clock Source : no
……
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd show available
Function
This command is used to inquire available LAPD list of specified BSC, RPPU board or
whole PCU
Mode
Usage

all
Options
BSCNo BSC No. 0~254

insensitive
all Input "all" to inquire all available

LAPD of whole PCU
<BSCName> to inquire all available
LAPD of specified BSC
Results

related
See Also
mt lapd block
mt lapd show state
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd show available
mt lapd unblock
Notes
When input <BSCNo> or <BSCName> as parameter, only display available LAPD on

primary RPPU, on which there are logical cells in use. To inquire the available LAPD on
backup RPPU, use <BoardNo> or all as input parameter.
Example
To Inquire the available LAPD on the No.4 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt gcell show available 4
RPPU :4
2 LAPD(s) available
RPPU :4
LAPD : 41
RPPU :4
LAPD : 42
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd show state
mt lapd show state
Function
This command is used to inquire the state of LAPD.
Mode
Usage
mt lapd show state {<BoardNo> all} | <LapdNo> | <LapdName>
Options
all Input "all" to maintain all LAPDs of

specified board
LapdNo The The No. of LAPD link 0~254

insensitive
Results
See Also
mt lapd block
mt lapd unblock
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd show state
Notes
None.
Example
To inquire the state of No.3 LAPD link.
pcu(advanced)# mt lapd show state 3
RPPU : 11
LAPD :3
Administer state : unblocked
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd show unavailable
Function
This command is used to inquire unavailable LAPD list of specified BSC, RPPU board
or whole PCU
Mode
Usage

| all
Options
BSCNo BSC No. 0~254

insensitive

available LAPD of whole PCU
available LAPD of specified
BSC
Results

related
See Also
mt lapd block
mt lapd show state
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd show unavailable
mt lapd unblock
Notes
When input <BSCNo> or <BSCName> as parameter, only display unavailable LAPD

on primary RPPU, on which there are logical cells in use. To inquire the unavailable
LAPD on backup RPPU, use <BoardNo> or all as input parameter
Example
To Inquire the available LAPD on the No.4 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt lapd show unavailable 4
RPPU :4
1 LAPD(s) unavailable
RPPU :4
LAPD : 41
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd unblock
mt lapd unblock
Function
This command is used to unblock LAPD.
Mode
Usage
mt lapd unblock {<BoardNo> all} | <LapdNo> | <LapdName>
Options
all Input "all" to maintain all LAPDs of specified

board

insensitive
Results

See Also
mt lapd block
mt lapd show state
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt lapd unblock
Example
Unblock the No.3 LAPD link.
pcu(advanced)# mt lapd unblock 3
RPPU :4
LAPD :3
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt nsvc block
mt nsvc block
Function
This command is used to block NSVC.
Mode
Usage
mt nsvc block <NSEI><NSVCI>
Options
NSVCI Network service virtual connection

0~65534
identifier
Results

See Also
mt nsvc reset
mt nsvc show state
mt nsvc unblock
Notes
1) NSEI and NSVCI must have been configured in database, and a correlation must
have been established between them.
2) The specified NSVC must have been in unblocked status.
3) It takes time to block NSVC, please wait for system response.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt nsvc block
Example
Block the NSVC whose NSEI is 4 and NSVCI is 10.
pcu(advanced)# mt nsvc block 4 10
WARNING: Operation will block the NSVC, and stops its services until it is unblocked!
Continue ?[Y/N]y
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt nsvc reset
mt nsvc reset
Function
This command is used to reset NSVC.
Mode
Usage
mt nsvc reset <NSEI><NSVCI>
Options

0~65534
identifier
Results

See Also
mt nsvc block
mt nsvc show state
mt nsvc unblock
Notes
2) The specified NSVC must have been in unblocked status.
3) It takes time to reset NSVC, please wait for system response.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt nsvc reset
Example
Reset the NSVC whose NSEI is 4 and NSVCI is 10.
pcu(advanced)# mt nsvc reset 4 10
WARNING: Operation will reset the NSVC, and stops its services until the reset
This operation takes time, waiting .
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt nsvc show state
mt nsvc show state
Function
This command is used to inquire the status of specified NSVC.
Mode
Usage
mt nsvc show state <NSEI><NSVCI>
Options

0~65534
identifier
Results
Success Operation successful and the related information.

See Also
mt nsvc reset
mt nsvc block
mt nsvc unblock
Notes
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt nsvc show state
Example
Inquire the status of the NSVC whose NSEI is 4 and NSVCI is 10.
pcu(advanced)# mt nsvc show state 4 10
NSVC state: unblocked
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt nsvc unblock
mt nsvc unblock
Function
This command is used to unblock NSVC.
Mode
Usage
mt nsvc unblock <NSEI><NSVCI>
Options

0~65535
identifier
Results

See Also
mt nsvc block
mt nsvc reset
mt nsvc show state
Notes
2) The specified NSVC must have been in blocked status.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt nsvc unblock
Example
Unblock the NSVC whose NSEI is 4 and NSVCI is 10.
pcu(advanced)# mt nsvc unblock 4 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic block
mt pcic block
Function
This command is used to block PCIC.
Mode
Usage
{<BscNo> <PcicNo>}|{<BoardNo> <E1No>

mt pcic block
{<E1slot>|all}}
Options
BscNo No. of BSC 0~254
PcicNo No. of PCIC 0~65534
E1No No. of E1 0~7
E1slot No. of E1slot 0~127
all Input "all" to maintain all PCICs of

specified E1 on specified RPPU board
Results
See Also
mt pcic show state

mt pcic unblock
mt pcic show available
mt pcic show unavailable
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic block
mt pcic show used
mt pcic show unused
Notes
Multiple PCIC number (19 at most) can be entered after BSC No. has been input.
These PCICs can be blocked simultaneously.
Example
Block the PCIC whose BSCNo is 0 and PCICNo is 10.
pcu(advanced)# mt pcic block 0 10
WARNING: Operation will block the PCIC, and stops the services of PCIC and its
related PDCH! Continue ?[Y/N]y
RPPU :1
E1 :1
E1Slot :6
BSC :0
PCIC : 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic show available
Function
This command is used to inquire available PCIC list of specified E1 on specified RPPU
board, of specified RPPU board, of specified BSC or whole PCU.
Mode
Usage

{<BoardNo> <E1No>} | all
Options
BSCNo. BSC No. 0~254

insensitive
E1No The No. of E1 0~7

available PCIC of whole PCU
available PCIC of specified
BSC
Results

related
Page 1 of 3
Command Reference
See Also
mt pcic block
mt pcic unblock
mt pcic show state
mt pcic show used
mt pcic show unused
Notes
When input <BSCNo> or <BSCName> as parameter, only display available PCIC on

primary RPPU, on which there are logical cells in use. To inquire the available PCIC on
backup RPPU, use <BoardNo> or "all" as input parameter.
Example
To Inquire the available PCIC on the No.4 E1 of the No.3 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt pcic show available 3 4
RPPU :2
E1 :0
60 PCIC(s) available
RPPU :3
E1 :4
E1Slot :4
BSC :0
PCIC : 129
……
RPPU :3
E1 :4
E1Slot : 63
Page 2 of 3
Command Reference
BSC :0
PCIC : 239
…….
pcu(advanced)#
Page 3 of 3
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic show state
mt pcic show state
Function
This command is used to inquire the state of specified PCIC.
Mode
Usage
mt pcic show state <BscNo><PcicNo>|{<BoardNo> <E1No> {<E1slot>|all}}
Options
BoardNo RPPU board No. 0~5,10~15
E1No No. of E1 0~7
all Input "all" to maintain all PCICs of

specified E1 on specified RPPU board
Results
Success Show the status of the specified PCIC.

See Also
mt pcic block
mt pcic unblock
mt pcic show used
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic show state
mt pcic show unused
Notes
None
Example
Inquire the state of the PCIC whose BSCNo is 0 and PCICNo is 140.
pcu(advanced)# mt pcic show state 0 10
RPPU :3
E1 :4
E1Slot : 48
BSC :0
PCIC : 140
Use state : used
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic show unavailable
Function
This command is used to inquire unavailable PCIC list and its state of E1 on specified
RPPU board, of specified RPPU board, of specified BSC or whole PCU.
Mode
Usage

| {<BoardNo> <E1No>} | all
Options

insensitive

unavailable PCIC of whole
PCU
Input "all" after <BSCNo>
or <BSCName> to inquire
all unavailable PCIC of
specified BSC
Results

related
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic show unavailable
See Also
mt pcic block
mt pcic unblock
mt pcic show state
mt pcic show used
mt pcic show unused
Notes
When input <BSCNo> or <BSCName> as parameter, only display unavailable PCIC on

primary RPPU, on which there are logical cells in use. To inquire the unavailable PCIC
on backup RPPU, use <BoardNo> or "all" as input parameter.
Example
To inquire the unavailable PCIC on the No.4 E1 of the No.3 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt pcic show unavailable 3 4
RPPU :3
E1 :4
1 PCIC(s) unavailable
RPPU :3
E1 :4
E1Slot : 54
BSC :0
PCIC : 205
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic show unused
mt pcic show unused
Function
This command is used to inquire unused PCIC list of specified of E1 on specified RPPU
board, of specified RPPU board, of specified BSC or whole PCU
Mode
Usage

mt pcic show unused
Options

insensitive

unused PCIC of whole PCU
Input "all" after <BSCNo>
or <BSCName> to inquire
all unused PCIC of
specified BSC
Results

See Also
mt pcic block
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic show unused
mt pcic unblock
mt pcic show used
mt pcic show state
Notes
When input <BSCNo> or <BSCName> as parameter, only display unused PCIC on

primary RPPU, on which there are logical cells in use. To inquire the unused PCIC on
Example
Inquire the unused PCIC on the No. 4 E1 of the No. 3 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt pcic show unused 3 4
RPPU :3
E1 :4
1 PCIC(s) unused
RPPU :3
E1 :4
E1Slot :4
BSC :0
PCIC : 129
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic show used
mt pcic show used
Function
This command is used to inquire used PCIC list of specified E1 on specified RPPU
board
Mode
Usage

mt pcic show used
Options

insensitive
all Input "all" to inquire all used

PCIC of whole PCU
used PCIC of specified BSC
Results

See Also
mt pcic block
mt pcic unblock
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic show used
mt pcic show unused
mt pcic show state
Notes
When input <BSCNo> or <BSCName> as parameter, only display used PCIC on

primary RPPU, on which there are logical cells in use. To inquire the used PCIC on
Example
Inquire the used PCIC on the No.4 E1 of the No.3 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# mt pcic show used 3 4
RPPU :3
E1 :4
1 PCIC(s) used
RPPU :3
E1 :4
E1Slot :5
BSC :0
PCIC : 161
pcu(advanced)
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic unblock
mt pcic unblock
Function
This command is used to unblock PCIC.
Mode
Usage
mt pcic unblock {<BscNo> <PcicNo>}|{<BoardNo> <E1No> {<E1slot>|all}}
Options
E1No No. of E1 0~7
Input "all" to maintain all

all PCICs of specified E1 on
specified RPPU board
Results

See Also
mt pcic block
mt pcic show state
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pcic unblock
mt pcic show unused
mt pcic used
Notes
None.
Example
Unblock the PCIC whose BSCNo is 0 and PCICNo is 10.
pcu(advanced)# mt pcic unblock 0 10
RPPU : 1
E : 1
E1Slot : 63
BSC : 0
PCIC : 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch block
mt pdch block
Function
This command is used to block PDCH.
Mode
Usage
mt pdch block {<LCNo>|<LCName>} {<PdchNo>|all}
Options
The name of logical

LCName cell, string, case
insensitive
PdchNo No. of PDCH 0~254
all Input "all" to maintain all

PDCHs of specified cell
Results

See Also
mt pdch show attr

mt pdch show ms
mt pdch show state
mt pdch unblock
mt pdch show list
mt pdch show available
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch block
mt pdch show unavailable
Notes
None.
Example
Block the PDCH whose LCNo is 6 and PdchNo is 0.
pcu(advanced)# mt pdch block 6 0
WARNING: Operation will block the PDCH, and stop its GPRS services until it is
unblocked! Continue ?[Y/N]y
Cell: 6
PDCH: 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show attr
mt pdch show attr
Function
This command is used to inquire PDCH attributes.
Mode
Usage
mt pdch show attr {<LCNo>|<LCName>} {<PdchNo>|all}
Options

insensitive
all Input "all" to maintain all PDCHs of

None
specified cell
Results

See Also
mt pdch block
mt pdch show ms
mt pdch show state
mt pdch unblock
mt pdch show list
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show attr
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the attributes of all the PDCH in the No.1 cell.
pcu(advanced)# #mt pdch show attr 1 all
1 PDCH(s) processed
Cell :1
PDCH :0
Channel combination : CH_COMB_PDTCH
PCIC Number :1
PCIC list :1
TRX :1
TN :5
TSC :0
No hop. Absolute frequency : 666
PDCH Timeslot Type : Normal PDCH
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show available
Function
This command is used to inquire available PDCH list of specified BSC, RPPU board or
whole PCU.
Mode
Usage
mt pdch show available {<BSCNo> all} | {<BSCName> all} | <BoardNo> | all
Options
BSCNo BSC No 0~254
BSCName Name of BSC, string, case insensitive
Input "all" to inquire all available

all PDCH of whole PCU. Input "all" after
<BSCNo> or <BSCName> to inquire
all available PDCH of specified BSC
Results

related
See Also
mt pdch block
mt pdch show ms
mt pdch show state
mt pdch unblock
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show available
mt pdch show list
mt pdch show attr
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the available PDCH on the RPPU 2.
pcu(advanced)# mt pdch show available 2
RPPU :2
2 available PDCH(s)
Cell :4
PDCH :0
Cell :4
PDCH :1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show list
mt pdch show list
Function
This command is used to inquire PDCH list of specified cell.
Mode
Usage
mt pdch show list <LCNo> | <LCName>
Options

Results

See Also
mt pdch block
mt pdch show ms
mt pdch show state
mt pdch unblock
mt pdch show attr
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show list
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the list of PDCH in the No.1 cell.
pcu(advanced)# mt pdch show list 1
RPPU :5
Cell :1
PDCH list :
Pdch: 0 Trx: 1 TN: 5
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show ms
mt pdch show ms
Function
This command is used to inquire the number of mobile stations on PDCH.
Mode
Usage
mt pdch show list {<LCNo>|<LCName>} {<PdchNo>|all}
Options

insensitive
PdchNo The No. of PDCH 0~254
all To maintain all PDCHs of specified cell
Results

See Also
mt pdch block
mt pdch show list
mt pdch show state
mt pdch unblock
mt pdch show attr
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show ms
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the number of mobile station on the PDCH in No.1 cell.
pcu(advanced)# mt pdch show ms 1 all
3 PDCH(s) processed
Cell :1
PDCH :0
Number of uplink MS :0
Number of downlink MS :0
Cell :1
PDCH :1
Cell :1
PDCH :2
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show state
mt pdch show state
Function
This command is used to inquire PDCH state.
Mode
Usage
mt pdch show state {<LCNo>|<LCName>} {<PdchNo>|all}
Options

insensitive
all To maintain all PDCHs of specified cell
Results

See Also
mt pdch block
mt pdch show list
mt pdch show ms
mt pdch unblock
mt pdch show attr
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show state
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the state of the all the PDCH in No.1 cell.
pcu(advanced)#mt pdch show state 4 all
2 PDCH(s) processed
Cell :4
PDCH :0
Cell :4
PDCH :1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show unavailable
Function
This command is used to inquire unavailable PDCH list and its state of specified BSC,
RPPU board or whole PCU.
Mode
Usage

| all
Options
BSCNo BSC No. 0~254
BSCName Name of BSC, string,

case insensitive

available PDCH of
whole PCU Input "all"
after <BSCNo> or
<BSCName> to inquire
all available PDCH of
specified BSC
Results

related
See Also
mt pdch block
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch show unavailable
mt pdch show ms
mt pdch show state
mt pdch unblock
mt pdch show list
mt pdch show attr
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the unavailable PDCH in the RPPU 2l.
pcu(advanced)#mt pdch show unava 2
RPPU :2
1 unavailable PDCH(s)
Cell :4
PDCH :2
Operation state : disabled
Availability state : device has not been initialized
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch unblock
mt pdch unblock
Function
This command is used to unblock PDCH.
Mode
Usage
mt pdch unblock {<LCNo>|<LCName>} {<PdchNo>|all}
Options
The name of logical

insensitive
all maintain all PDCHs of

specified cell
Results

See Also
mt pdch show attr

mt pdch show ms
mt pdch show state
mt pdch block
mt pdch show list
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt pdch unblock
Notes
None.
Example
Unblock the PDCH whose LCNo is 6 and PdchNo is 0.
pcu(advanced)# mt pdch unblock 6 0
Cell :6
PDCH : 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt sattrans show delay
mt sattrans show delay
Function
This command is used to inquire the delay information of the specified channel or of
all channels of a cell
Mode
Usage
mt sattrans show delay {<LCNo>|<LCName>} {{<TRXNo> <TN>}|all}
Options
The name of logical

insensitive
TRXNo TRX No. of the channel 0 ~ 255
TN Timeslot No. of the

0~7
channel
show all delay

all information of
specified cell's
channels
Results

See Also
None
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt sattrans show delay
Notes
None.
Example
pcu(advanced)# mt sattrans show delay 4 all
The specified cell is not configured to support satellite transmission
Transmission Delay of Cell: 160ms
TRXNo TN Transmission Delay of Channel(ms)
0 2 160
0 3 160
0 4 160
1 5 160
1 7 160
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt system boardversion
mt system boardversion
Function
This command is used to inquire the version of hardware.
Mode
Usage
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the version of hardware
See Also
mt system softversion
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the version of the hardware.
pcu(advanced)#mt system boardversion
GPRS-PCU Hardware Version 1.0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt system forceswitch
mt system forceswitch
Function
This command is used to forced switchover active and standby POMU board.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
mt system forceswitch
Options
None.
Results
Success None.
See Also
None.
Notes
1) This command will restart the system. Be cautious with it.

2) This command will switch over the currenct active and standby POMU boards.
Example
Switchover the active and standby POMU board.
pcu(super)#mt system forceswitch
WARNING: Operation will reboot system and interrupt services! Continue ?[Y/N]y
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt system forceswitch
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt system softversion
Function
This command is used to inquire the version of software.
Mode
Usage
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the version of software
See Also
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the version of the software.
pcu(advanced)#mt system softversion
G3PCU33
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt time set
mt time set
Function
This command is used to set the system time of POMU board.
Mode
Usage
mt time set {<Date> <Time>}|<Date>|<Time>
Options
Date The date to be set Format: YYYY/MM/DD
Time The time to be set Format: HH:MM:SS
Results
See Also
mt time show
Notes
None.
Example
Set the data of POMU board to be October 1st, 2001.
pcu(advanced)#mt time set 2001/10/01
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt time set
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt time show
mt time show
Function
This command is used to query the system time of POMU board.
Mode
Usage
mt time show
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the information related
See Also
mt time set
Notes
None.
Example
Query the data of POMU board.
pcu(advanced)#mt time show
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit mt time show
Current date : 2001/10/05
Current time : 11:48:46
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns set aliveretry
ns set aliveretry
Function
This command is used to modify Alive retry times.
Mode
Usage
ns set aliveretry <value>
Options
<value> The value of AliveRetry 5~15, default value 10
Results

See Also
ns show aliveretry
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the AliveRetry parameter into 10.
pcu(advanced)# ns set aliveretry 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns set alivetimer
ns set alivetimer
Function
This command is used to modify Alive timer.
Mode
Usage
ns set alivetimer <value>
Options
<value> The value of AliveTimer 3
Results

See Also
ns show alivetimer
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the AliveTimer parameter into 3.
pcu(advanced)# ns set alivetimer 3
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns set blockretry
ns set blockretry
Function
This command is used to modify Block retry times.
Mode
Usage
ns set blockretry <value>
Options
<value> The value of blockretry 1~6, default value 3
Results

See Also
ns show blockretry
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the BlockRetry parameter into 3.
pcu(advanced)# ns set blockretry 3
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns set blocktimer
ns set blocktimer
Function
This command is used to modify Block timer.
Mode
Usage
ns set bolcktimer <value>
Options
<value> The value of

1~120, default value 10
BlockTimer
Results

See Also
ns show blocktimer
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the BlockTimer parameter into 10.
pcu(advanced)# ns set blocktimer 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns set resetretry
ns set resetretry
Function
This command is used to modify Reset retry times.
Mode
Usage
ns set resetretry <value>
Options
<value> The value of ResetRetry 3
Results

See Also
ns show resetretry
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the ResetRetry parameter into 3.
pcu(advanced)# ns set resetretry 3
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns set resettimer
ns set resettimer
Function
This command is used to modify Reset timer.
Mode
Usage
ns set resettimer <value>
Options
<value> The value of

1~120, default value 10
ResetTimer
Results

See Also
ns show resettimer
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the ResetTimer parameter into 10.
pcu(advanced)# ns set resettimer 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns set testtimer
ns set testtimer
Function
This command is used to modify Test timer.
Mode
Usage
ns set testtimer <value>
Options
<value> The value of TestTime 1~255, default value 30
Results

See Also
ns show testtimer
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the TestTimer parameter into 30.
pcu(advanced)# ns set testtimer 30
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns set unblockretry
ns set unblockretry
Function
This command is used to modify Unblock retry times.
Mode
Usage
ns set unblockretry <value>
Options
<value> The value of unblockretry 1~6, default value 3
Results

See Also
ns show unblockretry
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the UnblockRetry parameter into 3.
pcu(advanced)# ns set unblockretry 3
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns show aliveretry
ns show aliveretry
Function
This command is used to inquire Alive retry times.
Mode
Usage
ns show aliveretry
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the Alive retry times
See Also
ns set aliveretry
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the AliveRetry parameter.
pcu(advanced)# ns show aliveretry
AliveRetry : 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns show alivetimer
ns show alivetimer
Function
This command is used to inquire Alive timer.
Mode
Usage
ns show alivetimer
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the Alive timer
See Also
ns set alivetimer
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the AliveTimer parameter.
pcu(advanced)# ns show alivetimer
AliveTimer : 3
pcu(advanced)
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns show all
ns show all
Function
This command is used to inquire all the NS system information.
Mode
Usage
ns show all
Options
None.
Results
Success Show all the NS system parameter
See Also
None.
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the all the NS system information..
pcu(advanced)# ns show all
BlockTimer : 10
BlockRetry :3
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns show all
UnblockRetry :3
ResetTimer : 10
ResetRetry :3
TestTimer : 30
AliveTimer :3
AliveRetry : 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns show blockretry
ns show blockretry
Function
This command is used to inquire Block retry times.
Mode
Usage
ns show blockretry
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the Block retry times
See Also
ns set blockretry
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the BlockRetry parameter.
pcu(advanced)# ns show blockretry
BlockRetry: 3
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns show blocktimer
ns show blocktimer
Function
This command is used to inquire Block timer.
Mode
Usage
ns show blocktimer
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the Block timer
See Also
ns set blocktimer
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the BlockTimer parameter.
pcu(advanced)# ns show blocktimer
BlockTimer: 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns show resetretry
ns show resetretry
Function
This command is used to inquire Reset retry times.
Mode
Usage
ns show resetretry
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the Reset retry times
See Also
ns set resetretry
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the ResetRetry parameter.
pcu(advanced)# ns show resetretry
ResetRetry: 3
pcu(advanced)
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns show resettimer
ns show resettimer
Function
This command is used to inquire Reset timer.
Mode
Usage
ns show resettimer
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the Reset timer
See Also
ns set resettimer
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the ResetTimer parameter.
pcu(advanced)# ns show resettimer
ResetTimer: 10
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns show testtimer
ns show testtimer
Function
This command is used to inquire Test timer.
Mode
Usage
ns show testtimer
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the Test timer
See Also
ns set testtimer
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the TestTimer parameter.
pcu(advanced)# ns show testtimer
TestTimer: 30
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit ns show unblockretry
Function
This command is used to inquire Unblock Retry timer.
Mode
Usage
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the unblock retry times
See Also
ns set unblockretry
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the UnblockRetry parameter.
pcu(advanced)# ns show unblockretry
UnblockRetry: 3
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nse add
nse add
Function
This command is used to add NSE.
Mode
Usage
nse add <NSEI> <OrgPrmBoardNo> <OrgSlvBoardNo>
Options
OrgPrmBoardNo Original active board No. of signaling

0~5, 10~15
entity
OrgSlvBoardNo Original standby board No. of

0~5, 10~15
signaling entity
Returned Result

See Also
nse set
nse show
nse del
Notes
1) NSEI must exist in NSVC data

2) The board type of OrgPrmBoardNo and OrgSlvBoardNo must be "RPPU"
active board and original standby board
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nse add
Example
Add the NSE and specify NSEI as 0, No. of active board as 0 and No. of standby
Board as 1.
pcu(advanced)# nse add 0 0 1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nse del
nse del
Function
This command is used to delete NSE.
Mode
Usage
nse del <NSEI> | all
Options
all Delete all the NSE None
Returned Result

See Also
nse add
nse set
nse show
Notes
None.
Example
Delete the NSE whose NSEI is 0.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nse del
pcu(advanced)# nse del 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nse set
nse set
Function
This command is used to modify NSE.
Mode
Usage
nse set <NSEI> <OrgPrmBoardNo> <OrgSlvBoardNo>
Options
OrgPrmBoardNo Original active board No. of signaling

0~5, 10~15
entity
OrgSlvBoardNo Original standby board No. of signaling

0~5, 10~15
entity
Returned Result

See Also
nse add
nse show
nse del
Notes
1) NSEI must exist in NSVC data

2) The board type of OrgPrmBoardNo and OrgSlvBoardNo must be "RPPU"
active board and original standby board
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nse set
Example
Modify the NSE whose NSEI is 0 and modify No. of active RPPU board as 0, No. of
standby RPPU board as 1.
pcu(advanced)# nse set 0 0 1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nse show
nse show
Function
This command is used to inquire NSE.
Mode
Usage
nse show <NSEI> | all
Options
all Inquire the informatiion on all the NSE None
Returned Result
Succeed Show the information of specified NSE

See Also
nse add
nse set
nse del
Notes
If the PrimeBoardNo or SlaveBoardNo is 255, the meaning is that the RPPU BoardNo
is inactive
Example
Inquire the information of all NSE.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nse show
pcu(advanced)# nse show all
NSEI OrgPrmBoardNo OrgSlvBoardNo PrimeBoardNo SlaveBoardNo
10 10 10 255 255
71 0 0 0 255
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nsvc add
nsvc add
Function
This command is used to add NSVC.
Mode
Usage
nsvc add <NSVCI> <NSEI> <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCI> <DLCI>
Options
NSVCI NSVCI 0~65534
NSEI Network service

0~65534
entity identifier
BCI BCID 0~30
If the DLCI type is 1: 16~1007

If the DLCI type is 2:16~1007
DLCI DLCI If the DLCI type is 3:1024~64511
Returned Result

See Also
nsvc set
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nsvc add
nsvc show
nsvc del
Notes
1) The combined input of BoardNo, LocalNo and BCI must exist in BC table.
2) The DLCI value must correspond to the DLCIType value in BC table.
3) PVC (corresponding to the BoardNo, LocalNo, and the combination of BCI and
DLCI) must be unique in this table.
4) The type of circuit board must be "RPPU".
5) The PVC No. in one port should not be larger than 1024, and that in one BC
should not be larger than 195.
Example
Add NSVC and specify its NSVCI as 0, NSEI as 0, board No.as 0, local No. as 0,
BCID as 0 and DLCI as 16.
pcu(advanced)# nsvc add 0 0 0 0 0 16
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nsvc del
nsvc del
Function
This command is used to delete NSVC.
Mode
Usage
nsvc del <NSVCI>
Options
NSVCI NSVCI 0~65534
Returned Result

See Also
nsvc add
nsvc set
nsvc show
Notes
None.
Example
Delete the NSVC whose NSVCI is 0.
pcu(advanced)# nsvc del 0
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nsvc del
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nsvc set
nsvc set
Function
This command is used to modify NSVC.
Mode
Usage
nsvc set <NSVCI> <NSEI> <BoardNo> <LocalNo> <BCI> <DLCI>
Options
NSVCI NSVCI 0~65534
NSEI Network service entity

0~65534
identifier
BCI BCID 0~30
If the DLCI type is 1: 16~1007

DLCI DLCI If the DLCI type is 3:1024~64511
Returned Result

See Also
nsvc add
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nsvc set
nsvc show
nsvc del
Notes
1) The combined input of BoardNo, LocalNo, and BCI must exist in BC table.
2) The DLCI value must correspond to the DLCIType value in BC table.
3) PVC(corresponding to the BoardNo, LocalNo, and the combination of BCI and
DLCI)
4) must be unique in this table.
5) The type of BoardNo must be "RPPU".
6) The PVC number in one port should not be larger than 1024, and that in one BC
should not be larger than 195.
Example
Modify NSVC whose NSVCI is 0, and modify NSEI as 0, board No. as 0, local No. as
0, BCID as 0 and DLCI as 16.
pcu(advanced)# nsvc set 0 0 0 0 0 16
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nsvc show
nsvc show
Function
This command inquires the configuration of the specified NSVC.
Mode
Usage
nsvc show <NSVCI> | all
Options
NSVCI NSVCI 0~65534
All Inquire the configuration of all the

None
NSVC.
Returned Result
Success Show the configuration of all the NSVC inquired

See Also
nsvc add
nsvc set
nsvc del
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the configuration of the NSVC whose NSVCI is 0.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit nsvc show
pcu(advanced)# nsvc show 0
NSVCI :0
NSEI :0
BoardNo :0
LocalNo :0
BCID :0
DLCI : 1007
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit omc set switchip
omc set switchip
Function
This command is used to set OMC server's IP.
Mode
Usage
omc set switchip <value>
Options
value IP Address format : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Returned Result

See Also
omc show switchip

omc show all
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the IP address of the OMC server into 10.110.10.198.
pcu(advanced)# omc set switchip 10.110.10.198
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit omc set switchip
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit omc set switchport
omc set switchport
Function
This command is used to set the port of OMC server.
Mode
Usage
omc set switchport <value>
Options
value Port No. 0~65535, default value is 65535
Returned Result

See Also
omc show switchport

omc show all
Notes
Switchport should be set as 6688.
Example
Modify the IP port of the OMC server into 6868.
pcu(advanced)# omc set switchport 6868
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit omc set switchport
pcu(advanced)
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit omc show all
omc show all
Function
This command is used to inquire the IP address and port of the OMC server.
Mode
Usage
omc show all
Options
None.
Returned Result
Succeed Show related information of the OMC.
See Also
omc show switchport

omc show switchip
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the information of OMC server.
pcu(advanced)# omc show all
OMCSwitchIP = 10.126.17.105
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit omc show all
OMCSwitchPort = 6868
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit omc show switchip
omc show switchip
Function
This command is used to inquire OMC server's IP.
Mode
Usage
omc show switchip
Options
None.
Returned Result
See Also
omc set switchip

omc show all
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the IP address of the OMC server.
pcu(advanced)# omc show switchip
SwitchIP = 129.12.188.128
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit omc show switchip
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit omc show switchport
omc show switchport
Function
This command is used to inquire the port of OMC server.
Mode
Usage
omc show switchport
Options
None.
Returned Result
Succeed Show the port of OMC server
See Also
omc set switchport

omc show all
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the port of OMC server.
pcu(advanced)# omc show switchport
SwitchPort = 6688
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit omc show switchport
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch active
patch active
Function
This command is used to activate patch on single board or all RPPU boards
Mode
Super user mode..
Usage
patch active <BoardNo> | allRPPU
Options
BoardNo Board No. 0 ~ 6, 8, 10 ~ 15
allRPPU all RPPU boards None
Results

See Also
patch load
patch deactive
patch confirm
patch remove
patch show
Notes
Patch file must have been loaded successfully
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch active
Example
Activate patch on board 0.
pcu(super)#patch active 0
Board 0 operation successful
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch confirm
patch confirm
Function
This command is used to confirm software patch on single board or all RPPU boards.
Mode
Super user mode..
Usage
patch confirm <BoardNo> | allRPPU
Options
Results

See Also
patch load
patch active
patch deactive
patch remove
patch show
Notes
Patch file must have been activated successfully
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch confirm
Example
Confirm software patch on board 0.
pcu(super)#patch confirm 0
Board 0 patch state is DEACTIVE
Operation unsuccessful
pcu(super)#patch active 0
pcu(super)#patch confirm 0
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch deactive
patch deactive
Function
This command is used to deactivate software patch on single board or all RPPU
boards.
Mode
Super user mode..
Usage
patch deactice <BoardNo> | allRPPU
Options
BoardNo Board No. 0 ~ 6, 8,10 ~ 15
Results

See Also
patch load
patch active
patch confirm
patch remove
patch show
Notes
Patch file must have been activated successfully
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch deactive
Example
Deactivate patch on board 0.
pcu(super)#patch deactive 0
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch load
patch load
Function
This command is used to load software patch on specified board .
Mode
Super user mode..
Usage
patch load <FileName> <HostIPAddress> <BoardNo>
Options
Patch file name to be loaded. Patch file must

FileName None
be under the download path of GPRSLOAD
HostIPAddre IP address of the loader server,

None
ss example : xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Results

See Also
patch active
patch deactive
patch confirm
patch remove
patch show
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch load
Notes
Patch file must under the download path of GPRSLOAD
Example
Load software patch on board 0.
pcu(super)#patch load ppupatch.PAT 129.12.222.81 0
Downloading***
Download file succeeds
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch remove
patch remove
Function
This command is used to remove software patch on single board or all RPPU boards.
Mode
Super user mode..
Usage
patch remove <BoardNo> | allRPPU
Options
Results

See Also
patch load
patch active
patch deactive
patch confirm
patch show
Notes
None
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch remove
Example
Remove software patch on board 0.
pcu(super)#patch remove 0
WARNING: This Operation will remove patch directly! Continue ?[Y/N]y
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch show
patch show
Function
This command is used to show software patch on single board or all RPPU boards.
Mode
Super user mode..
Usage
patch show <BoardNo> | all
Options
all all boards None
Results

See Also
patch load
patch active
patch deactive
patch confirm
patch remove
Notes
None
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit patch show
Example
Show software patch on board 0.
pcu(super)#patch show 0
Board 0
software patch version : 04B_VV_SP01
software patch state : RUNNING
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add attr
pcu add attr
Function
This command is used to add a record in attribute table.
Mode
Usage
<LCNo> <CGI> <BSC> <RA> <SGPRS> <PrimRPPU>

pcu add attr
<SecRPPU> <InUse> <LCName>
Options
LCNo Logical cell No. 0~65534
CGI Cell Global Identifier of this logical cell, BCD

Length: 13
code of CGI
BSC Base station controller No. of the logical cell 0~254
RA Route Area of the logical cell 00~FF
SGPRS Whether this logical cell supports GPRS or not yes, no
PrimRPPU Active RPPU No. of this logical cell 0~5, 10~15
Standby RPPU No. of this logical cell, when the

SecRPPU 0~5, 10~15,
Active RPPU does not work, standby RPPU will
255
take over its work
InUse Whether the configuration works true, false
Logical cell name, string, maximum length is 31

LCName characters, case insensitive. The first character
None
should be a letter, and followed by letter,
number, '-', '_' or '.'
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add attr
Results

See Also
pcu del attr

pcu set attr
pcu show attr
Notes
1) If the “inuse” parameter was set as “false”, it means that the configuration of this
cell is invalid and can not offer corresponding service.
2) When the active RPPU board in which the cell is configured breaks down, the
service in this cell will be switched to the standby RPPU board. When the
configured active board is recovered, the service will be switched back.
3) This command only serves to add data to the database. Please activate the cell
(mt gcell active) when all the data have been configured.
Example
Add a record in attribute table and specify its Logical cell No. as 0, CGI as
4600000010001, BSC No. as 0, route area No. as 01, support GPRS service, this cell
is configured on No.4 RPPU board as active board and No. 5 board as standby
one.and the cell should be named gprs1 and the configuration should take effect
instantly.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add 4600000010001 0 01 yes 4 5 true gprs1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add bscname
pcu add bscname
Function
This command is used to add a record in bscname table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add bscname <BSCNo> <BSCName>
Options
BSCNo BSC No. 0 ~ 254
Name of BSC, string, maximum length is 31

BSCName characters, case insensitive. The first character
Length: 31
should be a letter, and followed by letter, number, '-',
'_' or '.'
Results

See Also
pcu del bscname

pcu set bscname
pcu show bscname
Notes
1) The bscname table is optional configuration

2) The <BSCName> must be unique in whole PCU. If <BSCName> is configured, it
can be used in some commands as input parameter replacing <BSCNo>
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add bscname
Example
Add a record in bscname table and specify its BSC No. as 0, BSC Name as
huaweibsc1.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add bscname 1 huaweibsc1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add cspara
pcu add cspara
Function
This command is used to add a record in CS parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add cspara <LCNo> <SupportCS34> { <UpFixCs> <UpDefaultCs>

<UpThdCs1Cs2> <UpThdCs2Cs1> <UpThdCs2Cs3>
<DnFixCs> <DnDefaultCs> <DnThdCs1Cs2>
<DnThdCs2Cs1> <DnThdCs2Cs3> <DnThdCs3Cs2>
<DnThdCs3Cs4> <DnThdCs4Cs3> <ResAssStrType>}
Options
SupportCS34 Whether this logical cell supports CS34

yes, no
or not
CS1, CS2,
UpFixCs Uplink fixed CS type CS3, CS4,
UNFIXED
UpDefaultCs CS1, CS2,

Default uplink fixed CS type
CS3, CS4
Threshold of RLC block retransmit rate.

UpThdCsXCsX+1 X=1,2,3 If retransmit rate of a uplink TBF
0 ~ 100
is less than it, the Cs type could change
to CsX+1 from CsX.
UpThdCsX+1CsX X=1,2,3 If retransmit rate of a uplink TBF
0 ~ 100
is more than it, the Cs type could change
to CsX from CsX+1.
CS1, CS2,
DnFixCs Downlink fixed CS type CS3, CS4,
UNFIXED
Page 1 of 3
Command Reference
DnDefaultCs CS1, CS2,

Default downlink fixed CS type
CS3, CS4
DnThdCsXCsX+1 X=1,2,3 If retransmit rate of a downlink
0 ~ 100
TBF is less than it, the Cs type could
change to CsX+1 from CsX
DnThdCsX+1CsX X=1,2,3 If retransmit rate of a downlink
0 ~ 100
TBF is more than it, the Cs type could
change to CsX from CsX+1
The option of radio resource type which

will be used, value range: MaxBandWidth
ResAssStrType | SaveRadioRes. And it can only be set to NONE
MaxBandWidth when <SupportCS34>
="no".
Results

See Also
pcu del cspara

pcu show cspara
pcu set cspara
Notes
1) UpThdCsXCsX+1 must be less than UpThdCsXCsX-1, X=2,3

2) DnThdCsXCsX+1 must be less than DnThdCsXCsX-1, X=2,3
3) If only 2 parameters inputted, others are supplied with default value.
4) In the situation that system is configured to support CS3/4 and the downlink CS
type is fixed CS3/4, CS3/4 maybe is not supported due to the insufficient free
relay at Abis interface or other reason and only one PCIC can be applied by
PDCH. Then CS2 will be used
Example
Add the CS paremeter to No.0 cell and specify the uplink fixed CS type as CS-2,
default uplink fixed CS type as CS-2, the threshold that the uplink CS type can
upgrade as 0, the threshold that the uplink CS type should degrade as 100, the uplink
Page 2 of 3
Command Reference
fixed CS type as unfixed and the default uplink fixed CS type as CS-1, the threshold
that the downlink CS type can upgrade as 5.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add cspara 0 no cs2 cs2 0 0 0 0 0 0 unfixed cs1 5 10 10 20 10

20 MaxBandWidth
pcu(advanced)#
Page 3 of 3
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add e1exchange
pcu add e1exchange
Function
This command is used to add a record in E1 exchange table.
Mode
Usage
<RPPUNo> <E1No> <ConnnectType>

pcu add e1exchange
<RelatedE1No> <SynchroInfo>
Options
RPPUNo RPPU board No. 0~5, 10~15
E1No E1 No. 0~7
ConnnectType Connect type Bsc, other
RelatedE1No Peer end E1 No. 0~7, null
SynchroInfo If this E1 used for synchronizing Yes, no
Results

See Also
pcu del e1exchange

pcu set e1exchange
pcu show e1exchange
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add e1exchange
Notes
1) All E1s should be numbered unitarily within a RPPU according to the arranged
sequence of L2PU boards. The numbers are 0~7 from bottom to top.
2) If E1 is used to transmit data transparently, <ConnnectType> should input
"other" and <RelatedE1No> should not be NULL
3) If E1 does not need to adopt exchange and all occupied by PCU, set “destination
E1 number” as “null”. For example, setting E1 number as “2” is not valid.
4) If the E1 port has not been connected to E1 cable, do not configure that port. For
exaple, setting E1 number as “1” is not valid.
5) Among the E1 cables configured for each E1 port, there must be one to be used
to extract synchronous clock. For example, set the “synchronous clock
extraction” numbered “0” as “Yes”.
6) E1 cables for exchange must be set within the same L2PU board. E1s of
different boards cannot perform mutual exchange.
7) The involved cicuit board needs to be restarted after configuration has been
modified.
Example
Configure the No.0 and 1 E1 on No.0 RPPU board to transparently transmit the Asub
interface, the peer end of No.0 E1 is No.0 E1 on the BSC side and the peer end of
No.1 E1 is No.0 E1 on the MSC side. And the E1 to the BSC used for synchronizing.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add e1exchange 0 0 bsc 0 yes
pcu(advanced)#pcu add e1exchange 0 1 msc 0 no
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add e1slot
pcu add e1slot
Function
This command is used to add a record in E1 timeslot table.
Mode
Usage
<RPPUNo> <E1No> <E1TimeSlot> <BSCNo> <PCIC>

pcu add e1slot
<Usage>
Options
RPPUNo No. of Packet Processing

0~5, 10~15
Unit
E1No No. of E1 on that RPPU 0~7
E1Timeslot Time slot No. on E1 0~127
BSCNo No. of BSC 0~254
PCIC No. of PCIC 0~65534
Usage nouse, packetservice,

The usage of PCIC
lapdlink, other
Results

See Also
pcu del e1slot

pcu set e1slot
pcu show e1slot
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add e1slot
Notes
1) The PCIC number configured for PCU must be in line with the trunk circuit
number so as to ensure the precise location and allocation of trunk resources.
When numbering the trunk circuits for the E1’s sub-timeslots in PCU. The
sub-timeslots should be numbered from left to right and from top to bottom and
starting from 0. The PCIC of BSC should be numbered from top to bottom and
from left to right. Therefore, when using this command to add e1slot, make sure
that the difference of trunk link numbers in the 2 adjacent commands is 1 and
that of PCIC number, 32.
2) For Pb interface circuit, the first timeslot in E1 cable (i.e. sub-timeslot T0, T1, T2
and T3) is fixedly used for synchronization purpose. It is to be fixedly configured
in data configuration.
3) Each Lapd signaling link occupies one timeslot in E1 cable, corresponding to the
4 successive sub-timeslots in one timeslot. In all E1 cables connecting PCU and
one BSC, at least one signaling link needs to be configured. For the timeslot
whose trunk circuit property is Lapd signaling link, PCIC option configuration is
invalid, and can be assigned with any valid values.
modified.
Example
Configure a record of E1slot on No.24 timeslot No.2 E1 No.5 RPPU board and
specify the BSCNo as 0, PCIC as 1 which is used to send packet service.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add e1slot 5 2 24 0 1 packetservice
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add extmsrpar
pcu add extmsrpar
Function
This command is used to add a record in extended measure parameter table.
Mode
Usage
<LCNo> <ExtMeasOrd> <NccPermitted>

pcu add extmsrpar
<IntFrequency> <ExtRptType> <ExtRptPeriod>
Options
ExtMeasOrd Extended measure order, em0, em1

value range
em0 - MS cannot perform extended
measurement.
em1 - MS needs to send extended

measurement report network.
NccPermitted A bitmap of NCCS for

which the mobile station is
0~255
permitted to report
measurement
IntFrequency Frequency upon which the

interference measurement 0~31
shall be made
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add extmsrpar
ExtRptType Type of extended type1, type2, type3
measurement reporting to
which the frequencies on type1 - report the measurement of
the list are subject the 6 carrier frequencies with the
strongest signal.
type2 - report the measurement of
the 6 carrier frequencies with the
strongest signal under the condition
of correct BSIC decoding and NCC
permitting.
type3 - report the measurement of
carrier frequecies without BSIC
decoding
Time interval between

ExtRptPeriod extended measurement 60sec, 120sec, 240sec,…, 7680sec
reports
Results

See Also
pcu set extmsrpar

pcu del extmsrpar
pcu show extmsrpar
Notes
None.
Example
Add extended measurement parameter on No.8 cell and specify the extended
measure order as em0, A bitmap of NCCS for which the mobile station is permitted to
report measurement as 1, Frequency upon which the interference measurement shall
be made as 1, Type of extended measurement reporting to which the frequencies on
the list are subject as type 1, Time interval between extended measurement reports
as 60 seconds.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add extmsrpar 8 em0 1 1 type1 60sec
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add gprs
pcu add gprs
Function
This command is used to add a record in GPRS options table of a logical cell.
Mode
Usage
<LCNo> <NMO> <T3168> <T3192> <DRXTimerMax>

pcu add gprs <AccBurst> <CtrlAckType> <BsCvMax> <PanDec>
<PanInc> <PanMax> <EGPRSSupport>
Options
0~3
Network Mode of 0 - Network Mode of Operation I

NMO 1 - Network Mode of Operation II
Operation
2 - Network Mode of Operation III
3 - Reserved
T3168 500ms, 1000ms, 1500ms,…

Timeout value of T3168
4000ms
T3192 500ms, 1000ms, 1500ms, 0ms,

Timeout value of T3192
80ms, 120ms, 160ms, 200ms
1~64, no
no-no non-DRX mode after transfer
state
DRXTimerMax Maximum duration of 1s-1 second

DRX
2s-2 seconds
…
64s-64 seconds
Indicates whether 8 or
AccBurst 11 bits burst shall be 8bit, 11bit
used on PRACH
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add gprs
Default format of the 0 - default format is four access

PACKET CONTROL bursts
CtrlAckType
ACKNOWLEDGMENT 1 - default format is RLC/MAC
message control block
BsCvMax Parameter BsCvMaxvv 0~15
PanDec Parameter PanDec 0~7, nouse
PanInc Parameter PanInc 0~7, nouse
PanMax Parameter PanMax 4, 8,…, 32, nouse
EGPRSSupport Support Enhanced

yes, no
GPRS or not
Results

See Also
pcu set gprs

pcu del gprs
pcu show gprs
Notes
1) T3192 must be smaller than T3193. The default value of T3193 is 3000ms.
2) This command serves to add data to the database only. Please activate the cell
Example
Add a record in GPRS options table of No.0 celland specify the network mode of
operation as 1, Timeout value of T3168 as 500ms, Timeout value of T3192 as
1000ms, Maximum duration of DRX as 2 second, 11 bits burst shall be used on
PRACH, default format as RLC/MAC control block, Parameter BsCvMaxvv as 8,
Parameter PanDec as 2, Parameter PanInc as 2, Parameter PanMax as 8 and does
not Support Enhanced GPRS.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add gprs 0 0 500ms 1000ms 2s 11bit 1 8 2 2 8 No
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add lapd
pcu add lapd
Function
This command is used to add a record in LAPD table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add lapd <LAPDNo> <RPPUNo> <E1No> <StartTS> <BSCNo>
Options
LpadLinkNo No. of LAPD link 0~254
RPPUNo No. of Packet Processing Unit 0~5, 10~15
StartTS Start No. of time slot on E1 0~127
Results

See Also
pcu del lapd

pcu set lapd
pcu show lapd
Notes
1) The starting E1 timeslot number means the number of the first sub-timeslot of
the corresponding 4 successive sub-timeslots of one physical LAPD signaling
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add lapd
link. It should be in line with the pcu add e1slot added RelayNo whose usage is
LapdLink.
modified.
Example
Add No.7 LAPD and specify the RPPUNo as 0, E1No as 4, StartE1TS as 64, BSCNo
as 0.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add lapd 7 0 4 64 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add ncreselectpar
pcu add ncreselectpar
Function
This command is used to add a record in neighbour cell reselect parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add ncreselectpar <LCNo> <TempOffset> <PenaltyTime>

<ReselectOffset>
Options
TempOffset Negative offset to C32 that Mobile

0db, 10db, 20db,…,
station shall use for duration of
60db, infinity, nouse
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET
PenaltyTime 10sec, 20sec,

Length of time for which
30sec,…, 320sec,
GPRS_PENALTY_TIME is active
nouse
ReselcetOffset -52db. –48db…,

MS use this field to apply to a positive -16db, -12db,
or negative offset and a hysteresis to -10db,…, 10db,
the GPRS cell reselection criterion 12db, 16db,… 44db,
48db, nouse
Results

See Also

Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add ncreselectpar
pcu show ncreselectar
Notes
This command serves to add data to the database only. Please activate the cell (mt
gcell active) when all the data have been configured.
Example
Add a record of No.8 cell in neighbour cell reselect parameter table and specify
Negative offset to C32 that Mobile station shall use for duration of
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET as 10dB, Length of time for which
GPRS_PENALTY_TIME is active as 10sec, MS use this field to apply to a positive or
negative offset and a hysteresis to the GPRS cell reselection criterion as –2dB.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add ncreselectpar 8 10dB 10sec -2dB
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add neighbour
pcu add neighbour
Function
This command is used to add a record in neighbour cell table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add neighbour <LCNo> <NCNo>
Options
NCNo Neighbour cell No. 0~65534
Results

See Also
pcu set neighbour

pcu del neighbour
pcu show neighbour
Notes
2) LCNo and NCNo cannot be the same.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add neighbour
Example
Add No. 2 cell to be the neighbour cell to No.1 cell.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add neighbour 1 2
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add nwctrlmsrpar
pcu add nwctrlmsrpar
Function
This command is used to add a record in network control measure table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add nwctrlmsrpar <LCNo> <NonDrxPeriod> <RptPeriodI>

<RptPeriodT >
Options
NonDrxPeriod Time period for cell Nodrx, 0.24sec,

reselection measurement 0.48sec, 0.72sec,…,
reporting for packet idle 1.92sec
mode
RptPeriodI Base station controller No. 0.48sec, 0.96sec,

of this logical cell 1.92sec,…, 61.44sec
RptPeriodT Time period for cell 0.48sec, 0.96sec,

reselection measurement 1.92sec,…, 61.44sec
reporting for packet
transfer mode
Results

See Also
pcu set nwctrlmsrpar

pcu del nwctrlmsrpar
pcu show nwctrlmsrpar
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add nwctrlmsrpar
Notes
Example
Add a record of No.0 cell in network control measure table and specify Time period for
cell reselection measurement reporting for packet idle mode as 0.24 second, Base
station controller No. of this logical cell as 15.36 second, Time period for cell
reselection measurement reporting for packet transfer mode as 0.96 second
pcu(advanced)# pcu add nwctrlmsrpar 8 nc0 0.24sec 15.36sec 0.96sec
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add pccch
pcu add pccch
Function
This command is used to add a record in PCCCH table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add pccch <LCNo> <BSPBCCHBlks> <BSPAGBlksRes>

<BSPRACHBlks>
Options
BSPBCCHBlks No. of blocks of PBCCH 1~4
BSPAGBlksRes No. of blocks of PAGCH 0~12
BSPRACHBlks No. of blocks of PRACH 0~12
Results
See Also
pcu set pccch

pcu del pccch
pcu show pccch
Notes
1) The sum of PBCCH block number and PAGCH block number should not be
larger than 11. Otherwise, operation failure will occur.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add pccch
Example
Add a record of No.0 cell in PCCCH table and specify No. of blocks of PBCCH as 1,
No. of blocks of PAGCH as 3 and No. of blocks of PRACH as 4.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add pccch 0 1 3 4
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add pdchpara
pcu add pdchpara
Function
This command is used to add a record in PDCH parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add pdchpara <LCNo> <MaxUlHighLd> <MaxDlHighLd>

<MaxUlLowLd> <MaxDlLowLd>
Options
MaxUlHighLd Maximum uplink TBF numbers each PDCH supported 1~7
MaxDlHighLd Maximum downlink TBF numbers each PDCH 1~8

supported
MaxUlLowLd When the number of uplink TBFs on a PDCH 1~7

exceeds this value and circuit services load is low,
PCU begins to apply for a dynamic PDCH from BSC.
MaxDlLowLd When the number of downlink TBFs on a PDCH 1~8

exceeds this value and circuit services load is low,
Results

See Also
pcu set pdchpara

pcu del pdchpara
pcu show pdchpara
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add pdchpara
Notes
1) MaxUlLowLd should not be larger than MaxUlHighLd.

2) MaxDlLowLd should not be larger than MaxDlHighLd.
Example
Add a record of No.0 cell in PDCH parameter table and specify Maximum uplink TBF
numbers each PDCH supported as 6, Maximum downlink TBF numbers each PDCH
supported as 8, When the number of uplink TBFs on a PDCH exceeds 5, or the
number of downlink TBFs on a PDCH exceeds 7, and circuit services load is low,
pcu(advanced)# pcu add pdchpara 0 6 8 5 7
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add prach
pcu add prach
Function
This command is used to add a record in PRACH table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add prach <LCNo> <AccCtrlClass> <MaxRetrans1> <MaxRetrans2>

<MaxRetrans3> <MaxRetrans4> <S> <TxInt> <PL1>
<PL2> <PL3> <PL4>
Options
AccCtrlClass Access control class(16 bit bitmap) 0~65535
MaxRetrans1 Maximum retrans times on radio priority 1, 2, 4, 7

one

two

three

Four
s Minimum numbers of slots between two 12, 15, 20, 30,

successive channel request messages 41, 55, 76, 109,
163, 217
TxInt Numbers of slots to spread transmission 2~10, 12, 14,

of the random access 16, 20, 25, 32,
50
PL1 Persistence Level one 0~14, 16, nouse
PL2 Persistence Level two 0~14, 16, nouse
PL3 Persistence Level three 0~14, 16, nouse
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add prach
PL4 Persistence Level four 0~14, 16, nouse
Results

See Also
pcu set prach

pcu del prach
pcu show prach
Notes
Example
Add a record of No.0 cell in PRACH table and specify access control class(16 bit
bitmap) as 1, Maximum retrans times on radio priority one as 1, Maximum retrans
times on radio priority two as 2, Maximum retrans times on radio priority three as 4,
Maximum retrans times on radio priority Four as 7, Minimum numbers of slots
between two successive channel request messages as 12, numbers of slots to
spread transmission of the random access as 10, Persistence Level one as 12,
Persistence Level two as 13, Persistence Level three as 14, Persistence Level four as
15.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add prach 0 1 1 2 4 7 12 10 12 13 14 16
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add psi1
pcu add psi1
Function
This command is used to add a record in PSI1 table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add psi1 <LCNo> <PSI1Rpt> <MeasOrder> <PSIStatusInd> <BCCH>
Options
PSI1Rpt Packet System Information PSI1's

1~16
repeat period
MeasOrder Allow the measure report or not Yes, no
PSIStatusInd Support PSI Status message or not Yes, no
BCCH The BCCH absolute frequency of this

0~1023
logical cell
Results

See Also
pcu set psi1

pcu del psi1
pcu show psi1
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add psi1
Notes
Example
Add a record of No.0 cell in PSI1 table and specify Packet System Information PSI1's
repeat period as 5, does not Allow the measure report, does not Support PSI Status
message, The BCCH absolute frequency of this logical cell as 75.
pcu(advanced)#pcu add psi1 0 5 No No 75
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add pwpar
pcu add pwpar
Function
This command is used to add a record in power control table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add pwpar <LCNo> <ALPHA> <TAVGW> <TAVGT> <PB>

<PCMeasChan> <MeasChAvail> <NAVGI>
Options
ALPHA Alpha parameter 0.0, 0.1, 0.2,

0.3, ..., 0.9, 1.0
TAVGW Signal strength filter period for power 0, 1, 2, ..., 25

control in Packet Idle mode
TAVGT Signal strength filter period for power 0, 1, 2, ..., 25

control in Packet Transfer mode
PB Power reduction value used by the BTS 0db, -2db,

on PBCCH blocks -4db,…, -30db
PCMeasChan On which channel should the MS bcch, pdch

measure the received power level on the
downlink
MeasChAvail Indicate the PSI4 message to be yes, no

broadcasted or not
NAVGI Interfering signal strength filter constant 0, 1, ..., 15

for power control
Results

Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add pwpar
See Also
pcu set pwpar

pcu del pwpar
pcu show pwpar
Notes
Example
Add a record of No.0 cell in power control table and specify alpha parameter as 0,
signal strength filter period for power control in packet Idle mode as 1, signal strength
filter period for power control in packet transfer mode as 2, power reduction value
used by the BTS on PBCCH blocks as 2, interfering signal strength filter constant for
power control as 1, it is on the BCCH that the MS measures the received power level
on the downlink, the PSI4 message is not broadcasted.
pcu(advanced)#pcu add pwpar 0 0.1 2 2 -2dB BCCH No 1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add relatedinfo
pcu add relatedinfo
Function
This command is used to add a record in related information table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add relatedinfo <LCNo> <NCO> <BSIC> <SpgcCCCHSup>

<PriAccThrr> <RAColor>
Options
NCO Network control order Nc0, nc1, nc2
BSIC Base station identification

0~63
code
SpgcCCCHSup Indicates the support of

parameter
SPLIT_GP_CYCLE on Yes, no
CCCH from the network
side
PriAccThr Priority of packet access 0 - Packet access is not

allowed in the cell
3 - Packet access is
allowed for priority level 1
allowed for priority level 1 to
2 5 -
Packet access is allowed
for priority level 1 to 3
4
RAColor Route area color code 0~7
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add relatedinfo
Results

See Also
pcu set relatedinfo

pcu del relatedinfo
pcu show relatedinfo
Notes
Example
Add a record of No.9 cell in related information table and specify Network control
order as nc1, Base station identification code as 0, priority level 1 to 4, Route area
color code as 0. It does not support parameter SPLIT_GP_CYCLE on CCCH from the
network side and Packet access is allowed.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add relatedinfo 9 nc1 0 NO 6 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add reselectpar
pcu add reselectpar
Function
This command is used to add a record in reselect parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add <LCNo> <ReHyst> <C31Hyst> <C32Qual>

reselectpar <RndAccRtry> <TResel> <RARslctHyst>
Options
ReHyst Additional Hysteresis 0db, 2db, 4db, …,

14db
C31Hyst If set to C31Standard, the C31standard,

GPRS_RESELECT_HYSTER c31notuse
SIS shall be applied to the C31
C32Qual An exception rule for 0~1

GPRS_RESELCT_OFFSET
according to GSM 05.08 0: parameter
GPRS_RESELECT_O
FFSET will not be used
at the time of
calculating C32 for cell
reselection by MS.
1: parameter
GPRS_RESELECT_O
FFSET will be used at
the time of calculating
C32 for cell reselection
by MS.
RndAccRtry Whether the mobile station is Yes, no

allowed to access another cell
if available
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add reselectpar
TResel Mobile station is not allowed to 5sec. 10sec. 15sec,
reselect this cell for T_RESEL 20sec, 30sec, 60sec,
seconds if another cell is 120sec, 300sec, nouse
available
RARslctHyst In both STANDBY and READY 0db, 2db, 4db, 6db, …,

status the additional hysteresis 14db, nouse
which was applied when
selecting a cell in a new
Routing Area
Results

See Also
pcu set reselectpar

pcu del reselectpar
pcu show reselectar
Notes
Example
Add a record of No.8 cell in reselect parameter table and specify additional hysteresis
as 2dB, C31Hyst as C31Standard, An exception rule for GPRS_RESELCT_OFFSET
according to GSM 05.08 as 0, In both STANDBY and READY state the additional
hysteresis which was applied when selecting a cell in a new Routing Area as 2dB.
The mobile station is allowed to access another cell if available, Mobile station is not
allowed to reselect this cell for 10 seconds if another cell is available.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add reselectpar 8 2dB c31standard 0 yes 10sec 2dB
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add sattrans
pcu add sattrans
Function
This command is used to add a record in satellite transmission parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add sattrans <LCNo> <SuprtSatTrans>
Options
SuprtSatTrans Whether this logical cell supports yes, no

satellite transmission or not
Results

See Also
pcu set sattrans

pcu del sattrans
pcu show sattrans
Notes
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add sattrans
Example
Add a record of No.8 cell in satellite transmission parameter table and specify
SuprtSatTrans as yes,.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add sattrans 8 yes
The change will not take effect until the corresponding cell is reactivated
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add servpar
pcu add servpar
Function
This command is used to add a record in service parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu add servpar <LCNo> <CellBarAccess2> <ExcAcc> <RxLevAccMin>

<MsTxPwrMax> <PriorClass> <GPRSHCSThr>
<MultiBandRep>
Options
CellBarAccess2 Permit cell access or not Permit, nopermit
ExcAcc Exclusive access or not Exclusive, noexclusive
RxLevAccMin Minimum received level at 0~63

the mobile station
MsTxPwrMax Maximum TX power level 0~31

a mobile station may use
when accessing on a
packet control channel
PriorClass HCS priority for the cell 0~7, nouse
GPRSHCSThr HCS signal strength -110db, -108db, -106db, …,

threshold -48db, nouse
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu add servpar
MultiBandRep MultiBand reporting 0~3
0 - Normal reporting of the six
strongest cells respective of the
band used
1 - The MS shall report the
strongest cell in each of the
frequency bands in the BA lists
2 - The MS shall report the two
3 - The MS shall report the three
Results

See Also
pcu set servpar

pcu del servpar
pcu show servpar
Notes
None.
Example
Add a record of No.8 cell in service parameter table and specify minimum received
level at the mobile station as 60, Maximum TX power level a mobile station may use
when accessing on a packet control channel as 5, HCS priority for the cell as 2, HCS
signal strength threshold as -110dB. The MS shall report the two strongest cell in
each of the frequency bands in the BA lists. In this cell cell access is permitted but
Exclusive access is not allowed.
pcu(advanced)# pcu add servpar 8 permit noexclusive 60 5 2 -110dB 2
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu cellconfig add
pcu cellconfig add
Function
This command is used to configure all the parameters of a cell.
Mode
Usage
pcu cellconfig add <LCNo>
Options
Results
Success Show reference on configuration the parameter to the cell

step by step
See Also
pcu cellconfig dynset
Notes
None.
Example
Add a cell of 8
pcu(super)#pcu cell add 8
1-Attr 2-CSPara 3-ExtMsrPar 4-GPRS
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu cellconfig add
5-NCReselectPar 6-Neighbour 7-NWCtrlMsrPar 8-PCCCH
9-PDCHPara 10-PRACH 11-PSI1 12-PwPar
13-RelatedInfo 14-ReselectPar 15-ServPar
C-Show Changes S-Save Changes I-Check Config Q(or Ctrl+C)-Quit
Please select table number
AddData: 1
OPERATION KEY
? display help information
show show config in use(usage:show <LCNo>|all)
copy copy config(usage:copy <LCNo>)
ctrl+c break from current config
add data input only arglist "<arg0> <arg1> ..." to add data,
don't need the key word "pcu add TableName"
AddData_Attr: 8 4600525220010 0 02 YES 12 1 TRUE cell8
……
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu cellconfig dynset
Function
This command is used to configure all the parameters of a cell.
Mode
Usage
pcu cellconfig dynset <LCNo>
Options
Results
Success Show reference on configuration the parameter to the cell

step by step
See Also
pcu cellconfig add
Notes
None.
Example
Modify the DRXTimerMax parameter to no Non-DRX mode after transfer state
pcu(super)#pcu cellconfig dynset 8
1-CSPara 2-ExtMsrPar 3-GPRS 4-NCReselectPar
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu cellconfig dynset
5-Neighbour 6-NWCtrlMsrPar 7-PCCCH 8-PDCHPara
9-PRACH 10-PSI1 11-PwPar 12-RelatedInfo
13-ReselectPar 14-ServPar
C-Show Changes E-Enable Changes I-Check Config Q(or Ctrl+C)-Quit
please choose table number
SetData:3
*************Old Configuration**************
LCNo : 100
NMO :1
T3168 : 1000ms
T3192 : 1000ms
DRXTimerMax : 8s
AccBurst : 8bit
CtrlAckType : 1
OPERATION KEY
? display help information
show show config in use(usage:show <LCNo>|all)
copy copy config(usage:copy <LCNo>)
ctrl+c break from current config
set data input only arglist "<arg0> <arg1> ..." to set data,
don't need the key word "pcu set TableName"
SetData_GPRS: 0 0 500ms 1000ms no 11bit 1 8 2 2 8 No
……
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu check cellconfig
pcu check cellconfig
Function
This command is used to check if all information about a cell is perfect. Parameters
can be a list of cell No. (max 100), or all
Mode
Usage
pcu check cellconfig {<LCNo1> <LCNo2> ...}|all
Options
LCNo1 Logical cell No. 0~65534
all All logical cell No. None
Results
See Also
pcu cellconfig add

Notes
1) This command is used to check the integrity of cell configuration and provide the
result report. It works according to 2 conditions (configured PBCCH and PBCCH
to be configured) and lists the check results from these 2 conditions.
2) Several cell numbers can be entered into the cell number table. The entered cell
numbers should be separated with Space. Take “8 5 3 9” as an example, it can
support 100 cell numbers at most.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu check cellconfig
Example
Check the configuraton information of No.2 cell.
pcu(advanced)# pcu check cellconfig 2
Logical cell No. list: 2
________________________________________________________________
The following display the tables that are not configured .If one cell is configured
PBCCH, refer to the left column for the tables that are not configured. If no PBCCH,
refer to right.
_______________________________________________________________
_________________The check report of LCNO 2__________________
PBCCH CONFIGURED NO PBCCH CONFIGURED
miss the following tables miss the following tables
*RelatedInfo *RelatedInfo
*PDCHPara(Optional) *PDCHPara(Optional)
*ServPar
*Neighbour(Optional)
*NwCtrlMsrPar(Optional)
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu check e1config
pcu check e1config
Function
This command is used to check the E1 configuration of the system, including the
E1Exchange table, the E1Slot table and the LAPD table.
Mode
Usage
pcu check e1config
Options
None.
Results
See Also
pcu check cellconfig
Notes
This command checks the validity of the configuration related to E1 in PCU system.
There are 3 tables involved: E1 exchange table, E1 timeslot allocation table and
LAPD links table.
1) E1 exchange table
Prerequesite: for a RPPU circuit board, 0~3 is the E1 cable number of the L2PU
board No.1 (inserted at the lower part of RPPU) and 4~7 is the E1 cable number of
L2PU board No.2 (inserted at the upper part of RPPU). The exchange of E1 is the
E1’s corresponding timeslot exchange within the same L2PU circuit board.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu check e1config
Rule 1: if the E1 cables are for the purpose of exchange, “E1 number” and
“destination E1 number” are a pair of mutual exchange E1 cable. They must have
their relative configurations.
Rule 2: if the E1 cables are for the purpose of exchange, the exchange counterpart of
“E1 number” should be the E1 cable in the same L2PU board. For example, if “E1
number” 3, “destination E1 number” 3; if 4 ”E1 number” 7, 4 ”destination E1
number” 7.
2) E1time slot allocation table
Rule 1: the “usage” of the first 4 sub-timeslots of each E1 cable is Nouse. (for
synchronous usage)
Rule 2: if the usage of timeslot is LpadLink, its timeslot must be 4 successive

sub-timeslots, 4×n~4*(n + 1)-1, 0< n <31.
Rule 3: if the “connetion type” in E1 exchange table is MSC, it is not necessary to

configure timeslot in the E1 timeslot allocation table.
3) LAPDlinks table
Rule 1: the “RPPU board”, “E1 timeslot number” and “starting timeslot number” of the
LAPD link identified with “LAPD link number” must have their corresponding timeslots
in the E1 timeslot allocation table and must be the same with “peer BSC number” and
the “usage” is LapdLink.
Rule 2: the starting E1 timeslot number configured in the E1 timeslot allocation table
with the “usage” set as LapdLink should have a corresponding configuration in the
LAPD link table.
Example
Check the E1 configuration of PCU.
pcu(advanced)# pcu check e1config
----------------------E1Exchange check report-----------------------------
E1Exchange configurations are ok
-------------------------E1Slot check report--------------------------------
PPUNo 10 E1No 7 Timeslot 1 should be configured and used as synchronous

timeslot
-------------------------LAPD check report--------------------------------
LAPD configurations are ok
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del allofonecell
pcu del allofonecell
Function
This command is used to delete all the configuration of the cell.
Mode
Usage
pcu del allofonecell <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
None.
Notes
If the cell is in active status, deleting the configuration is not allowed. If this command
is used in the cell’s active status, system will prompt error. So before using this
command, please deactivate the cell (with the command mt gcell deactive) so as to
stop its service.
Example
Delete all the configuration information of No.0 cell.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del allofonecell 0
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del allofonecell
Are you sure to delete the record(s)?[Y/N]y
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del alltable
pcu del alltable
Function
This command is used to delete all table configuration of the PCU.
Mode
Usage
pcu del alltable
Options
None.
Results

See Also
download config.
Notes
1) This command is used to delete tables configured in PCU except IPAddress,

route, SNMP, OMC, BSSGP, NS, PCU SWITCH configuration information
2) After deleting all the table configured, please download the new configuration
using command "download config", and then save the new configuration using
command "write"
3) Please reboot the system using command "reboot" after saving the new
configuration
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del alltable
Example
Delete all the table configuration information of PCU.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del alltable
This command will delete all table config in PCU system, except
IPAddress, route, SNMP, OMC, BSSGP, NS, PCU SWITCH configure information
Are you sure to delete the record(s)?[Y/Ny
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del attr
pcu del attr
Function
This command is used to delete a record of cell in attribute table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del attr <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add attr

pcu set attr
pcu show attr
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del attr
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in attribute table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del attr 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del bscname
pcu del bscname
Function
This command is used to delete a record of in bscname table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del bscname <BSCNo>
Options
BSCNo BSC No. 0~254
Results

See Also
pcu add bscname

pcu set bscname
pcu show bscname
Notes
None.
Example
Delete the record of No.0 BSC in bscname table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del bacname 0
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del bscname
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del cspara
pcu del cspara
Function
This command is used to delete a record in CS parameter table.
Mode
Advanced maintenance mode, super user configuration mode
Usage
pcu del cspara <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add cspara

pcu show cspara
pcu set cspara
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del cspara
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in CS parameter table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del cspara 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del e1exchange
pcu del e1exchange
Function
This command is used to delete a record in E1 exchange table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del e1exchange <RPPUNo> <E1No>
Options
E1No the No. of E1 0~7
Results

See Also
pcu add e1exchange

pcu set e1exchange
pcu show e1exchange
Notes
The involved cicuit board needs to be restarted after configuration has been modified.
Example
Delete the record of in E1exchange table about the configuration on No.2 E1 of No.5
RPPU board.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del e1exchange
pcu(advanced)# pcu del e1exchange 5 2
Operation successfulpcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del e1slot
pcu del e1slot
Function
This command is used to delete a record in E1 timeslot table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del e1slot <RPPUNo> <E1No> <E1TimeSlot>
Options
E1No E1 No. on a RPPU board 0~7
E1TimeSlot Time slot No. on E1 0~127
Results

See Also
pcu add e1slot

pcu set e1slot
pcu show e1slot
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del e1slot
Example
Delete the E1slot on No.21 timeslot of No.2 E1 which is on the No.5 RPPU board.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del e1slot 5 2 21
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del extmsrpar
pcu del extmsrpar
Function
This command is used to delete a record in extended measurement parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del extmsrpar <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add extmsrpar

pcu set extmsrpar
pcu show extmsrpar
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del extmsrpar
Example
Delete the record of No.8 cell in CSDC table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del extmsrpar 8
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del gprs
pcu del gprs
Function
This command is used to delete a record in GPRS Options table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del gprs <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add gprs

pcu set gprs
pcu show gprs
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del gprs
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in GPRS Options table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del gprs 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del lapd
pcu del lapd
Function
This command is used to delete a record in LAPD table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del lapd <LAPDNo>
Options
<LAPDNo> The No. of LAPD link 0~254
Results

See Also
pcu add lapd

pcu set lapd
pcu show lapd
Notes
Example
Delete the record of No.7 LAPD in LAPD table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del lapd 7
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del lapd
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del ncreselectpar
Function
This command is used to delete a record in neighbour cell reselect parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del ncreselectpar <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also

pcu show ncreselectpar
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del ncreselectpar
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in neighbour cell reselect parameter table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del ncreselectpar 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del neighbour
pcu del neighbour
Function
This command is used to delete a record in neighbour cell table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del neighbour <LCNo> <NCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add neighbour

pcu set neighbour
pcu show neighbour
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del neighbour
Example
Delete the neighbour cell relationship between No.0 cell and No.1 cell.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del neighbour 0 1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del nwctrlmsrpar
Function
This command is used to delete a record in network control measurement table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del nwctrlmsrpar <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also

Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del nwctrlmsrpar
Example
Delete the record of No.8 cell in network control measurement table.
pcu(advanced)# #pcu del nwctrlmsrpar 8
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del pccch
pcu del pccch
Function
This command is used to delete a record in PCCCH table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del pccch <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add pccch

pcu set pccch
pcu show pccch
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del pccch
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in PCCCH table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del pccch 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del pdchpar
pcu del pdchpara
Function
This command is used to delete a record in PDCH parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del pdchpara <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add pdchpara

pcu set pdchpara
pcu show pdchpara
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del pdchpar
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in PDCH parameter table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del pdchpara 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del prach
pcu del prach
Function
This command is used to delete a record in PRACH table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del prach <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add prach

pcu set prach
pcu show prach
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del prach
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in PRACH table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del prach 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del psi1
pcu del psi1
Function
This command is used to delete a record in PSI1 table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del psi1 <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add psi1

pcu set psi1
pcu show psi1
Notes
None.
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in PSI1 table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del psi1 0
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del psi1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del pwpar
pcu del pwpar
Function
This command is used to delete a record in power control table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del pwpar <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add pwpar

pcu set pwpar
pcu show pwpar
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del pwpar
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in power control table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del pwpar 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del relatedinfo
pcu del relatedinfo
Function
This command is used to delete a record in related information table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del relatedinfo <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add relatedinfo

pcu set relatedinfo
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del relatedinfo
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in related information table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del relatedinfo 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del reselectpar
pcu del reselectpar
Function
This command is used to delete a record in reselect parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del reselectpar <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add reselctpar

pcu set reselectpar
pcu show reselectpar
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del reselectpar
Example
Delete the record of No.8 cell in reselect parameter table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del reselectpar 8
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del sattrans
pcu del sattrans
Function
This command is used to delete a record in satellite transmission parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del sattrans <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add sattrans

pcu set sattrans
pcu show sattrans
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del sattrans
Example
Delete the record of No.8 cell in sattrans parameter table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del sattrans 8
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del servpar
pcu del servpar
Function
This command is used to delete a record in service parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu del servpar <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add servpar

pcu set servpar
pcu show servpar
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu del servpar
Example
Delete the record of No.0 cell in service parameter table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu del servpar 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu limit showssn
pcu limit showssn
Function
This command is used to show the license information of the system.
Mode
Usage
pcu limit showssn
Options
None.
Results

See Also
None.
Notes
None.
Example
Display the license information.
pcu(super)# pcu limit showssn
*************************************
The office No. is:GPRS PCU 33B 999999
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu limit showssn
Current license information:
Maximum supported number of 64kps Gb link timeslot is:768
Maximum supported number of subscribers is :50000
CS3/4 is supported
NMO1 is supported
PCCCH access is supported
PDCA(PDCH conversion algorithm) is supported
***********license information is over**********
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set attr
pcu set attr
Function
This command is used to modify a record in attribute table.
Mode
Usage
<LCNo> <CGI> <BSC> <RA> <SGPRS> <PrimRPPU>

pcu set attr
<SecRPPU> <InUse> <LCName>
Options
CGI Cell Global Identity of this logical cell, BCD Length: 13

code of CGI
BSC Base station controller No. of this logical cell 0~254
RA Route Area of this logical cell 00~FF
SGPRS Whether this logical cell supports GPRS or not Yes, no
PrimRPPU No. of active RPPU board which deals with 0~5, 10~15
the cell
SecRPPU No. of standby RPPU board which deals with 0~5, 10~15, 255
the cell. when the active RPPU board does
not work, standby RPPU board will take over
this cell's work
InUse Whether this cell's configuration will take effect true, false
LCName Logical cell name, string, maximum length is None

31 characters, case insensitive. The first
character should be a letter, and followed by
letter, number, '-', '_' or '.'
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set attr
Results

See Also
pcu del attr

pcu add attr
pcu show attr
Notes
1) If the inused parameter was set as “false”, it means that this cell is invalid and
cannot offer corresponding service.
2) When the active RPPU board through which the cell is configured breaks down,
the service in this cell will be switched to the standby RPPU board. When the
configured active board is recovered, the service will be switched back.
3) This command only adds data to the database. Please activate the cell when all
the data have been configured.
Example
Modify a record in attribute table and modify the Logical cell No. into 0, CGI into
4600000010001, BSC No into 0, route area No. into 01, support GPRS service, this
cell is configured on No.4 RPPU board as active board and No.5 RPPU board as
standby board, the cell should be named as gprs1 and the configuration should take
effect instantly,
pcu(advanced)# pcu set attr 0 4600000010001 0 01 yes 4 5 true gprs1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set bscname
pcu set bscname
Function
This command is used to modify a record in bscname table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set bscname <BSCNo> <BSCName>
Options
BSCNo Logical cell No. 0~65534
BSCName Name of BSC, string, maximum length is 31 None

characters, case insensitive. The first
character should be a letter, and followed by
letter, number, '-', '_' or '.'
Results

See Also
pcu del bscname

pcu add bscname
pcu show bscname
Notes
1) This command is used to modify <BSCName> according <BSCNo>

2) The <BSCNo> must exist in bscname table
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set bscname
Example
Modify a record in bscname table,
pcu(advanced)# pcu set bscname 1 huaweibsc1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set cspara
pcu set cspara
Function
This command is used to modify a record in CS parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set cspara <LCNo> <SupportCS34> {<UpFixCs> <UpDefaultCs>

<DnFixCs> <DnDefaultCs> <DnThdCs1Cs2>
<DnThdCs2Cs1> <DnThdCs2Cs3> <DnThdCs3Cs2>
<DnThdCs3Cs4> <DnThdCs4Cs3> <ResAssStrType>}
Options
SupportCS34 Whether this logical cell supports CS34

yes, no
or not
CS1, CS2,
UpFixCs Uplink fixed CS type CS3, CS4,
UNFIXED
UpDefaultCs CS1, CS2,

Default uplink fixed CS type
CS3, CS4
UpThdCsXCsX+1 X=1,2,3 If retransmit rate of a uplink TBF
0 ~ 100
is less than it, the Cs type could change
to CsX+1 from CsX.

UpThdCsX+1CsX X=1,2,3 If retransmit rate of a uplink TBF
0 ~ 100
is more than it, the Cs type could change
to CsX from CsX+1.
DnFixCs Downlink fixed CS type CS1, CS2,
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
CS3, CS4,
UNFIXED
DnDefaultCs CS1, CS2,

Default downlink fixed CS type
CS3, CS4
DnThdCsXCsX+1 X=1,2,3 If retransmit rate of a downlink
0 ~ 100
TBF is less than it, the Cs type could
change to CsX+1 from CsX

DnThdCsX+1CsX X=1,2,3 If retransmit rate of a downlink
0 ~ 100
TBF is more than it, the Cs type could
change to CsX from CsX+1
The option of radio resource type which

will be used, value range: MaxBandWidth
ResAssStrType | SaveRadioRes. And it can only be set to NONE
MaxBandWidth when <SupportCS34>
="no".
Results

See Also
pcu del cspara

pcu show cspara
pcu set cspara
Notes
1) UpThdCsXCsX+1 must be less than UpThdCsXCsX-1, X=2,3

2) DnThdCsXCsX+1 must be less than DnThdCsXCsX-1, X=2,3
3) If only 2 parameters inputted, others are supplied with default value.
4) In the situation that system is configured to support CS3/4 and the downlink CS
type is fixed CS3/4, CS3/4 maybe is not supported due to the insufficient free
relay at Abis interface or other reason and only one PCIC can be applied by
PDCH. Then CS2 will be used
Example
Modify the CS paremeter to No.0 cell and specify the uplink fixed CS type as CS-2,
default uplink fixed CS type as CS-2, the threshold that the uplink CS type can
upgrade as 0, the threshold that the uplink CS type should degrade as 100, the uplink
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
fixed CS type as unfixed and the default uplink fixed CS type as CS-1, the threshold
that the downlink CS type can upgrade as 5
pcu(advanced)# pcu set cspara 0 no cs2 cs2 0 0 0 0 0 0 unfixed cs1 10 20 10 20 10

20 MaxBandWidth
pcu(advanced)#
Page 3 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set e1exchange
pcu set e1exchange
Function
This command is used to modify a record in E1 exchange table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set e1exchange <RPPUNo> <E1No> <ConnnectType>

<RelatedE1No> <SynchroInfo>
Options
E1No No. of E1 0~7
Connect type, value range : "bsc",

"other". If E1 is used to transmit
ConnnectType data transparently, bsc, other
here should input "other" and
<RelatedE1No>
RelatedE1No Related E1 that exchange with

0~7, null
E1No
SynchroInfo If this E1 used for synchronizing Yes, no
Results

See Also
pcu del e1exchange

pcu add e1exchange
pcu show e1exchange
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set e1exchange
Notes
1) All E1s should be numbered unitarily within a RPPU according to the arranged
sequence of L2PU boards. The numbers are 0~7 from bottom to top.
2) If E1 is used to transmit data transparently, <ConnnectType> should input
"other" and <RelatedE1No> should not be NULL
3) If E1 does not need to adopt exchange and all occupied by PCU, set “destination
E1 number” as “null”. For example, setting E1 number as “2” is not valid.
4) If the E1 port has not been connected to E1 cable, do not configure that port. For
exaple, setting E1 number as “1” is not valid.
5) Among the E1 cables configured for each E1 port, there must be one to be used
to extract synchronous clock. For example, set the “synchronous clock
extraction” numbered “0” as “Yes”.
6) E1 cables for exchange must be set within the same L2PU board. E1s of
different boards cannot perform mutual exchange.
modified.
Example
Modify the No.0 and 1 E1 onNo.0 RPPU board to transparently transmit the Asub
interface, No.0 E1 should be connected to BSC and No.1 E1 should be connected to
MSC
pcu(advanced)# pcu set e1exchange 0 0 bsc 1 yes
pcu(advanced)#pcu set e1exchange 0 1 msc 0 no
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set e1slot
pcu set e1slot
Function
This command is used to modify a record in E1 timeslot table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set e1slot <RPPUNo> <E1No> <E1TimeSlot> <BSCNo> <PCIC>

<Usage>
Options
RPPUNo No. of Packet Processing 0~5, 10~15

Unit
E1Timeslot Time slot No. on E1 0~127
PCIC No. of PCIC 0~65534
Usage The usage of PCIC PacketService: used in division

service
LapdLink: used in Lpad link
Other: used in other services.
NoUse: used in synchronization.
Results

Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set e1slot
See Also
pcu del e1slot

pcu add e1slot
pcu show e1slot
Notes
Example
Modify the E1slot lays on the No.24 16kbit/s sub-timeslot of the No.2 E1 which is on
the No.5 RPPU board, and modify the BSC it connects to into 0, its PCIC into 1 and it
is used to send packet service.
pcu(advanced)# pcu set e1slot 5 2 24 0 1 packetservice
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set extmsrpar
pcu set extmsrpar
Function
This command is used to modify a record in extended measure parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set extmsrpar <LCNo> <ExtMeasOrd> <NccPermitted>

<IntFrequency> <ExtRptType> <ExtRptPeriod>
Options
ExtMeasOrd Extended measure order, value

em0, em1
range
A bitmap of NCCS for which the
NccPermitted mobile station is permitted to report 0~255
measurement
Frequency upon which the

IntFrequency interference measurement shall be 0~31
made
Type of extended measurement

ExtRptType reporting to which the frequencies type1, type2, type3
on the list are subject
ExtRptPeriod Time interval between extended 60sec, 120sec,

measurement reports 240sec,…, 7680sec
Results

Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set extmsrpar
See Also
pcu add extmsrpar

pcu del extmsrpar
pcu show extmsrpar
Notes
stop its service.
Example
Modify extended measurement parameter in No.8 cell, and modify the extended
measurement order as em0, A bitmap of NCCS for which the mobile station is
permitted to report measurement as 1, Frequency upon which the interference
measurement shall be made as 1, Type of extended measurement reporting to which
the frequencies on the list are subject as type 1, Time interval between extended
measurement reports as 60 seconds.
pcu(advanced)# pcu set extmsrpar 8 em0 1 1 type1 60sec
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set gprs
pcu set gprs
Function
This command is used to modify a record in GPRS options table of a logical cell.
Mode
Usage
pcu set gprs <LCNo> <NMO> <T3168> <T3192> <DRXTimerMax>

<AccBurst> <CtrlAckType> <BsCvMax> <PanDec>
<PanInc> <PanMax> <EGPRSSupport>
Options
NMO Network Mode of 0~3

Operation
0 - Network Mode of Operation I
1 - Network Mode of Operation II
2 - Network Mode of Operation III
3 - Reserved
T3168 Timeout value of T3168 500ms, 1000ms, 1500,… 4000ms
T3192 Timeout value of T3192 500ms, 1000ms, 1500, 0ms,

80ms, 120ms, 160ms, 200ms
DRXTimerMax Maximum duration of DRX 1~64, no

no-no non-DRX mode after
transfer state
1s-1 secongd
2s-2 secongd
…
64s-64 seconds
AccBurst Indicates whether 8 or 11 8bit, 11bit

bits burst shall be used on
PRACH
Page 1 of 3
Command Reference
CtrlAckType Default format of the 0 - default format is four access
PACKET CONTROL bursts
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
message 1 - default format is RLC/MAC
control block
BsCvMax Parameter BsCvMax 0~15
PanDec Parameter PanDec 0~7, nouse
PanInc Parameter PanInc 0~7, nouse
PanMax Parameter PanMax 4, 8,…, 32, nouse
EGPRSSuppo Support Enhanced GPRS yes, no

rt or not
Results

See Also
pcu add gprs

pcu del gprs
pcu show gprs
Notes
1) If the cell is in active status, deleting the configuration is not allowed. If this
command is used in the cell’s active status, system will prompt error. So before
using this command, please deactivate the cell (with the command mt gcell
deactive) so as to stop its service.
2) T3192 must be smaller than T3193. The default of T3193 is 3000ms.
Example
Modify a record in GPRS options table of No.0 cell, and modify the network mode of
operation as 1, Timeout value of T3168 as 500ms, Timeout value of T3192 as
1000ms, Maximum duration of DRX as 2 second, 11 bits burst shall be used on
PRACH, default format as RLC/MAC control block, Parameter BsCvMax as 8,
Parameter PanDec as 2, Parameter PanInc as 2, Parameter PanMax as 8 and does
not Support Enhanced GPRS.
Page 2 of 3
Command Reference
pcu(advanced)# pcu set gprs 0 0 500ms 1000ms 2s 11bit 1 8 2 2 8 No
pcu(advanced)#
Page 3 of 3
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set lapd
pcu set lapd
Function
This command is used to modify a record in LAPD table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set lapd <LAPDNo> <RPPUNo> <E1No> <StartTS> <BSCNo>
Options
LpadLinkNo No. of LAPD link 0~254
RPPUNo No. of Packet Processing Unit 0~5, 10~15
StartTS Start No. of time slot on E1 0~127
Results

See Also
pcu del lapd

pcu add lapd
pcu show lapd
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set lapd
Notes
Example
Modify a No.7 LAPD on the No.64 timeslot of No.4 E1 which is on the No.0 RPPU
board, and modify the BSCNo it connects to into 0
pcu(advanced)# pcu set lapd 7 0 4 64 0
HINT : The change will not take effect until the corresponding RPPU board reboots
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set ncreselectpar
Function
This command is used to modify a record in neighbour cell reselect parameter table.
Mode
Usage
<LCNo> <GPRSTempOffset>
<GPRSPenaltyTime> <RslctOffset>
Options
GPRSTempOffset Negative offset to C32 that 0db, 10db, 20db,…,

Mobile station shall use for 60db, infinity, nouse
duration of
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSE
T
GPRSPenaltyTime Length of time for which 10sec, 20sec,

GPRS_PENALTY_TIME is 30sec,…, 320sec,
activated nouse
RslctOffset MS use this field to apply to a -52db. –48db…,

positive or negative offset and -16db, -12db,
a hysteresis to the GPRS cell -10db,…, 10db,
reselection criterion 12db, 16db,… 44db,
48db, nouse
Results

See Also
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set ncreselectpar
pcu show ncreselectar
Notes
stop its service.
Example
Modify a record of No.8 cell in neighbour cell reselect parameter table, and modify
Negative offset to C32 that Mobile station shall use for duration of
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET as 10dB, Length of time for which
GPRS_PENALTY_TIME is active as 10 second, MS use this field to apply to a
positive or negative offset and a hysteresis to the GPRS cell reselection criterion as
-2dB.
pcu(advanced)# pcu set ncreselectpar 8 10dB 10sec -2dB
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set neighbour
pcu set neighbour
Function
This command is used to set a record in neighbour cell table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set neighbour <LCNo> <NCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu add neighbour

pcu del neighbour
pcu show neighbour
Notes
2) LCNo and NCNocannot be the same.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set neighbour
Example
Modify No.2 cell to be the neighbour cell of No.1cell.
pcu(advanced)# pcu set neighbour 1 2
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set nwctrlmsrpar
Function
This command is used to modify a record in network control measure table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set nwctrlmsrpar <LCNo> <NonDrxPeriod> <RptPeriodI>

<RptPeriodT >
Options
NonDrxPeriod Time period for cell reselection Nodrx, 0.24sec, 0.48sec,

measurement reporting for 0.72sec,…, 1.92sec
packet idle mode
RptPeriodI Base station controller No. of 0.48sec, 0.96sec,

this logical cell 1.92sec,…, 61.44sec
RptPeriodT Time period for cell reselection 0.48sec, 0.96sec,

measurement reporting for 1.92sec,…, 61.44sec
packet transfer mode
Results

See Also

Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set nwctrlmsrpar
Notes
stop its service.
Example
Modify a record of No.0 cell in network control measurement table, and modify Time
period for cell reselection measurement reporting for packet idle mode as 0.24
second, Base station controller No. of this logical cell as 15.36 second, Time period
for cell reselection measurement reporting for packet transfer mode as 0.96 second.
pcu(advanced)# pcu set nwctrlmsrpar 8 nc0 0.24sec 15.36sec 0.96sec
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set pccch
pcu set pccch
Function
This command is used to modify a record in PCCCH table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set pccch <LCNo> <BSPBCCHBlks> <BSPAGBlksRes>

<BSPRACHBlks>
Options
BSPBCCHBlks No. of blocks of PBCCH 1~4
BSPAGBlksRes No. of blocks of PAGCH 0~12
BSPRACHBlks No. of blocks of PRACH 0~12
Results
See Also
pcu add pccch

pcu del pccch
pcu show pccch
Notes
1) The sum of PBCCH block number and PAGCH block number should not be
larger than 11. Otherwise, operation failure will occur.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set pccch
Example
Modify a record of No.0 cell in PCCCH table, and modify No. of blocks of PBCCH as
1, No. of block of PAGCH as 3 and No. of block of PRACH as 4.
pcu(advanced)# pcu set pccch 0 1 3 4
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set pdchpara
pcu set pdchpara
Function
This command is used to modify a record in PDCH parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set pdchpara <LCNo> <MaxUlHighLd> <MaxDlHighLd>

<MaxUlLowLd> <MaxDlLowLd>
Options
MaxUlHighLd Maximum uplink TBF numbers each PDCH 1~7

supported
MaxDlHighLd Maximum downlink TBF numbers each PDCH 1~8

supported
MaxUlLowLd When the number of uplink TBFs on a PDCH 1~7

exceeds this value and circuit services load is
low, PCU begins to apply for a dynamic PDCH
from BSC.
MaxDlLowLd When the number of downlink TBFs on a 1~8

PDCH exceeds this value and circuit services
load is low, PCU begins to apply for a dynamic
PDCH from BSC.
Results

See Also
pcu add pdchpara
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set pdchpara
pcu del pdchpara
pcu show pdchpara
Notes
1) MaxUlLowLdcannot be lager than MaxUlHighLd.

2) MaxDlLowLdcannot be larger than MaxDlHighLd.
Example
Modify a record of No.0 cell in PDCH parameter table, and modify Maximum uplink
TBF numbers each PDCH supported as 6, Maximum downlink TBF numbers each
PDCH supported as 8, When the number of uplink TBFs on a PDCH exceeds 5, or
the number of downlink TBFs on a PDCH exceeds 7, and circuit services load is low,
pcu(advanced)# pcu set pdchpara 0 6 8 5 7
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set prach
pcu set prach
Function
This command is used to modify a record in PRACH table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set prach <LCNo> <AccCtrlClass> <MaxRetrans1> <MaxRetrans2>

<MaxRetrans3> <MaxRetrans4> <S> <TxInt> <PL1> <PL2>
<PL3> <PL4>
Options
AccCtrlClass Access control class(16 bit bitmap) 0~65535
MaxRetrans1 Maximum retrans times on radio priority one 1, 2, 4, 7
MaxRetrans2 Maximum retrans times on radio priority two 1, 2, 4, 7

three
MaxRetrans4 Maximum retrans times on radio priority Four 1, 2, 4, 7
s Minimum numbers of slots between two 12, 15, 20, 30,

successive channel request messages 41, 55, 76, 109,
163, 217
TxInt Numbers of slots to spread transmission of 2~10, 12, 14,

the random access 16, 20, 25, 32,
50
PL1 Persistence Level one 0~14, 16, nouse
PL2 Persistence Level two 0~14, 16, nouse
PL3 Persistence Level three 0~14, 16, nouse
PL4 Persistence Level four 0~14, 16, nouse
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set prach
Results

See Also
pcu add prach

pcu del prach
pcu show prach
Notes
stop its service.
Example
Modify a record of No.0 cell in PRACH table, and modify Access control class(16 bit
bitmap) as 1, Maximum retrans times on radio priority one as 1, Maximum retrans
times on radio priority two as 2, Maximum retrans times on radio priority three as 4,
Maximum retrans times on radio priority Four as 7, Minimum numbers of slot between
two successive channel request messages as 12, numbers of slot to spread
transmission of the random access as 10, Persistence Level one as 12, Persistence
Level two as 13, Persistence Level three as 14, Persistence Level four as 15.
pcu(advanced)# pcu set prach 0 1 1 2 4 7 12 10 12 13 14 16
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set psi1
pcu set psi1
Function
This command is used to modify a record in PSI1 table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set psi1 <LCNo> <PSI1Rpt> <MeasOrder> <PSIStatusInd> <BCCH>
Options
PSI1Rpt Packet System Information PSI1's repeat 1~16

period
MeasOrder Allow the measure report or not yes, no
PSIStatusInd Support PSI Status message or not yes, no
BCCH The BCCH absolute frequency of this logical 0~1023

cell
Results

See Also
pcu add psi1

pcu del psi1
pcu show psi1
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set psi1
Notes
stop its service.
Example
Modify a record of No.0 cell in PSI1 table, and modify Packet System Information
PSI1's repeat period as 5, The BCCH absolute frequency of this logical cell as 75.And
in this cell it does not Allow the measure report and does not Support PSI Status
message.
pcu(advanced)#pcu set psi1 0 5 No No 75
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set pwpar
pcu set pwpar
Function
This command is used to modify a record in power control table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set pwpar <LCNo> <ALPHA> <TAVGW> <TAVGT> <PB>

<PCMeasChan> <MeasChAvail> <NAVGI>
Options
ALPHA Alpha parameter 0.0, 0.1, 0.2,

0.3, ..., 0.9, 1.0
TAVGW Signal strength filter period for power 0, 1, 2, ..., 25

control in Packet Idle mode
TAVGT Signal strength filter period for power 0, 1, 2, ..., 25

control in Packet Transfer mode
PB Power reduction value used by the BTS on 0db, -2db,

PBCCH blocks -4db,…, -30db
PCMeasChan On which channel should the MS measure bcch, pdch

the received power level on the downlink
MeasChAvail Indicate the PSI4 message is broadcast or yes, no

not
NAVGI Interfering signal strength filter constant for 0~15

power control
Results
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set pwpar
See Also
pcu add pwpar

pcu del pwpar
pcu show pwpar
Notes
stop its service.
Example
Modify a record of No.0 cell in power control table, and modify Alpha parameter as 0,
Signal strength filter period for power control in Packet Idle mode as 1, Signal
strength filter period for power control in Packet Transfer mode as 2, Power reduction
value used by the BTS on PBCCH blocks as 2, nterfering signal strength filter
constant for power control as 1. It is on the BCCH that the MS measure the received
power level on the downlink, and the PSI4 message is not broadcasted,
pcu(advanced)#pcu set pwpar 0 0.1 2 2 -2dB BCCH No 1
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set relatedinfo
pcu set relatedinfo
Function
This command is used to modify a record in related information table.
Mode
Usage
<LCNo> <NCO> <BSIC> <SpgcCCCHSup>

pcu set relatedinfo
<PriAccThrr> <RAColor>
Options
NCO Network control order nc0, nc1, nc2

nc0: MS automatically
performs cell reselection.
nc1: MS needs to send
measurement report to the
network, and automatically
performs cell reselection.
nc2: MS needs to send
measurement report to the
network, and unable to
automatically perform cell
reselection.
BSIC Base station identification code 0~63
SpgcCCCHSup Indicates the support of yes, no

parameter SPLIT_GP_CYCLE
on CCCH from the network
side
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set relatedinfo
PriAccThr Priority access through 0 - Packet access is not
allowed in the cell
allowed for priority level 1
2 5 -
Packet access is allowed
for priority level 1 to 3
4
RAColor Route area color code 0~7
Results

See Also
pcu add relatedinfo

pcu del relatedinfo
Notes
stop its service.
Example
Modify a record of No.9 cell in related information table, and modify Network control
order as nc1, Base station identification code as 0, Packet access is allowed for
priority level 1 to 4, Route area color code as 0. In this cell it does not support
parameter SPLIT_GP_CYCLE on CCCH from the network side.
pcu(advanced)# pcu set relatedinfo 9 nc1 0 NO 6 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set reselectpar
pcu set reselectpar
Function
This command is used to modify a record in reselect parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set reselectpar <LCNo> <ReHyst> <C31Hyst> <C32Qual>

<RndAccRtry> <TResel> <RARslctHyst>
Options
ReHyst Additional Hysteresis 0db, 2db, 4db, …,

14db
C31Hyst If set to C31Standard, the C31standard,

GPRS_RESELECT_HYSTERS c31notuse
IS shall be applied to the C31
C32Qual An exception rule for 0~1

GPRS_RESELCT_OFFSET
according to GSM 05.08
RndAccRtry Whether the mobile station is Yes, no

allowed to access another cell
if available
TResel Mobile station is not allowed to 5sec. 10sec. 15sec,

reselect this cell for T_RESEL 20sec, 30sec, 60sec,
seconds if another cell is 120sec, 300sec, nouse
available
RARslctHyst In both STANDBY and READY 0db, 2db, 4db, 6db, …,

status the additional hysteresis 14db, nouse
which applies when selecting a
cell in a new Routing Area
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set reselectpar
Results

See Also
pcu add reselectpar

pcu del reselectpar
pcu show reselectar
Notes
stop its service.
Example
Modify a record of No.8 cell in reselect parameter table, and modify Additional
Hysteresis as 2dB, set to C31Standard, An exception rule for
GPRS_RESELCT_OFFSET according to GSM 05.08 as 0, Mobile station is not
allowed to reselect this cell for T_RESEL seconds if another cell is availableis 10
second, In both STANDBY and READY status the additional hysteresis which applies
when selecting a cell in a new Routing Area as 2dB. the mobile station is allowed to
access another cell if available,
pcu(advanced)# pcu set reselectpar 8 2dB c31standard 0 yes 10sec 2dB
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set sattrans
pcu set sattrans
Function
This command is used to modify a record in sattrans parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set sattrans <LCNo> <SuprtSatTrans>
Options
SuprtSatTrans Whether this logical cell yes, no

supports satellite
transmission or not
Results

See Also
pcu add sattrans

pcu del sattrans
pcu show sattrans
Notes
stop its service.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set sattrans
Example
Modify a record of No.8 cell in sattrans parameter table
pcu(advanced)# pcu set sattrans 8 yes
The change will not take effect until the corresponding cell is reactivated
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set servpar
pcu set servpar
Function
This command is used to modify a record in service parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu set servpar <LCNo> <CellBarAccess2> <ExcAcc> <RxLevAccMin>

<MsTxPwrMax> <PriorClass> <GPRSHCSThr>
<MultiBandRep>
Options
CellBarAccess2 Permit cell access or not Permit, nopermit
ExcAcc Exclusive access or not Exclusive, noexclusive
RxLevAccMin Minimum received level 0~63

at the mobile station
MsTxPwrMax Maximum TX power level 0~31

a mobile station may use
when accessing on a
packet control channel
PriorClass HCS priority for the cell 0~7, nouse
GPRSHCSThr HCS signal strength -110db, -108db, -106db, …,

threshold -48db, nouse
Page 1 of 3
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu set servpar
MultiBandRep MultiBand reporting 0 - Normal reporting of the six
strongest cells respective of the
band used
1 - The MS shall report the
2 - The MS shall report the two
3 - The MS shall report the three
Results

See Also
pcu add servpar

pcu del servpar
pcu show servpar
Notes
stop its service.
Example
Modify a record of No.8 cell in service parameter table, and modify Minimum received
level at the mobile station as 60, Maximum TX power level a mobile station may use
when accessing on a packet control channel as 5, HCS priority for the cell as 2, HCS
signal strength threshold as -110dB. And in this cell cell access is permitted but
Exclusive access is not allowed, The MS shall report the two strongest cell in each of
the frequency bands in the BA lists.
pcu(advanced)# pcu set servpar 8 permit noexclusive 60 5 2 -110dB 2
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 3
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show attr
pcu show attr
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in attribute table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show attr <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by <FieldName>]
Options
all Show attribute

information of all
logical cells
Conditions Condition expressions format "<FieldName> OP <ValueList>"

<FieldName> is field name in this
table,OP include ">", "<", "=", ">=",
"<=", "<>", "between".
FieldName Sort field name
Results
See Also
pcu add attr

pcu del attr
pcu set attr
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show attr
Notes
CurrentRPPU records the RPPU board to which the cell currently belongs. Its value
can only be PrimRPPU, SecRPPU or 255. If CurrentRPPU is PrimRPPU, it means
that the cell is configured at the original RPPU. If it is SecRPPU, it means that the
original board has been out of service and the cell has been moved to the standby
board. For 255, it means the cell has not yet started to work, and does not exist at
any circuit board.
Example
Inquire the record in attribute table whose RA=0
pcu(super)#pcu show attr where ra = 1
LCNo :0
CGI : 4600525220002
BSC :0
RA :1
SGPRS : yes
PrimRPPU :0
SecRPPU :4
CurrentRPPU : 255
InUse : false
LCName : cell0
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show bscname
pcu show bscname
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in bscname table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show bscname < BSCNo >|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
BSCNo BSC No. 0~254
all Show attribute

information of all
logical cells

table,OP include ">", "<", "=", ">=",
"<=", "<>", "between".
Results

See Also
pcu add bscname

pcu del bscname
pcu set bscname
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show bscname
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire all the configuration of BSC in bscname table.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show bscname all
BSCNo BSCName
0 fulingBSC1
1 fulingBSC2
2 fulingBSC3
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show cellconfig
pcu show cellconfig
Function
This command is used to show all configuration about a logical cell.
Mode
Usage
pcu show cellconfig <LCNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pcu del attr
Notes
None.
Example
1) Inquire the configuration of No.3 cell.

pcu(advanced)# pcu show cellconfig 3
*******************Table Attr*******************
LCNo :3
Page 1 of 7
Command Reference
CGI : 4600620490001
BSC :1
SiteNo :0
RA :1
SGPRS : yes
PrimRPPU : 14
SecRPPU : 12
CurrentRPPU : 14
ActiveState : active
InUse : true
LCName : pdchao
******************Table CSPara******************
LCNo :3
SupportCS34 : yes
UpFixCs : UNFIXED
UpDefaultCs : cs1
UpThdCs1Cs2 :5
UpThdCs2Cs1 : 10
UpThdCs2Cs3 :2
UpThdCs3Cs2 :5
UpThdCs3Cs4 :2
UpThdCs4Cs3 :5
DnFixCs : UNFIXED
DnDefaultCs : cs2
DnThdCs1Cs2 :5
DnThdCs2Cs1 : 10
Page 2 of 7
Command Reference
DnThdCs2Cs3 :2
DnThdCs3Cs2 :5
DnThdCs3Cs4 :2
DnThdCs4Cs3 :5
ResAssStrType : maxbandwidth
****************Table ExtMsrPar*****************
LCNo :3
ExtMeasOrd : em0
NccPermitted : 1
IntFrequency : 1
ExtRptType : type1
ExtRptPeriod : 60sec
*******************Table GPRS*******************
LCNo :3
NMO :1
T3168 : 1000ms
T3192 : 1000ms
DRXTimerMax : 8s
AccBurst : 8bit
CtrlAckType : 1
BsCvMax :7
PanDec :3
PanInc :3
PanMax : 12
Page 3 of 7
Command Reference
EGPRSSuppot : no
***************Table NCReselectPar**************
LCNo :3
GPRSTempOffset : 10db
GPRSPenaltyTime : 10sec
RslctOffset : -2db
*****************Table Neighbour****************
LCNo : 3
NCNo : 2
***************Table NWCtrlMsrPar***************
LCNo :3
NonDrxPeriod : 0.24sec
RptPeriodI : 15.36sec
RptPeriodT : 0.96sec
*******************Table PCCCH******************
LCNo :3
BSPBCCHBlks : 1
BSPAGBlksRes : 3
BSPRACHBlks : 4
Page 4 of 7
Command Reference
*****************Table PDCHPara*****************
LCNo :3
MaxUlHighLd : 7
MaxDlHighLd : 8
MaxUlLowLd : 4
MaxDlLowLd : 4
*******************Table PRACH******************
LCNo :3
AccControlClass : 0
MaxRetrans1 :7
MaxRetrans2 :7
MaxRetrans3 :7
MaxRetrans4 :7
S : 12
TxInt : 10
PL1 : 12
PL2 : 13
PL3 : 14
PL4 : 16
*******************Table PSI1*******************
LCNo :3
PSI1Rpt :5
MeasOrder : no
Page 5 of 7
Command Reference
PSIStatusInd : yes
BCCH : 44
*******************Table PwPar******************
LCNo :3
ALPHA : 1.0
GAMMA :0
TAVGW :2
TAVGT :2
PB : -4db
PCMeasChan : bcch
MeasChAvail : no
NAVGI :2
****************Table RelatedInfo***************
LCNo :3
NCO : nc0
BSIC :0
SpgcCCCHSup : no
PriAccThr :6
RAColor :1
****************Table ReselectPar***************
LCNo :3
GPRSCellReselctHyesteresis : 2db
Page 6 of 7
Command Reference
C31Hyst : c31standard
C32Qual :0
RandAccessRetry : no
TResel : 10sec
RAReselectHyst : 2db
******************Table ServPar*****************
LCNo :3
CellBarAccess2 : permit
ExcAcc : noexclusive
RxLevAccMin : 60
MsTxPwrMax :5
PriorClass :2
GPRSHCSThr : -110db
MultiBandRep :0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 7 of 7
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show cspara
pcu show cspara
Function
This command is used to show a record in CS parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show cspara <LCNo> | all |{where <Condition>}[order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show the CS

parameter information
of all logical cells
Conditions Condition expressions format "<FieldName> OP

<ValueList>" <FieldName> is
field name in this table,OP
include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results

See Also
pcu add cspara

pcu del cspara
pcu set cspara
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show cspara
Notes
None.
Example
Display a record in CS parameter table.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show cspara where upfixcs=cs3
2 record(s) satisfying condition in table CSPara
(a)LCNo (b)SupportCS34 (c)UpFixCs (d)UpDefaultCs
(e)UpThdCs1Cs2(f)UpThdCs2Cs1 (g)UpThdCs2Cs3 (h)UpThdCs3Cs2
(i)UpThdCs3Cs4 (j)UpThdCs4Cs3 (k)DnFixCs (l)DnDefaultCs
(m)DnThdCs1Cs2(n)DnThdCs2Cs1(o)DnThdCs2Cs3(p)DnThdCs3Cs2
(q)DnThdCs3Cs4 (r)DnThdCs4Cs3 (s)ResAssStrType
CSPara 0 :
(a)1 (b)yes (c)cs3 (d)cs3 (e)10 (f)20 (g)10 (h)20 (i)10 (j)20
(k)cs4 (l)cs4 (m)10 (n)20 (o)10 (p)20 (q)10 (r)20 (s)maxbandwidth
CSPara 1 :
(a)4 (b)yes (c)cs3 (d)cs3 (e)1 (f)2 (g)1 (h)2 (i)1 (j)2 (k)cs3
(l)cs3 (m)1 (n)2 (o)1 (p)2 (q)1 (r)2 (s)maxbandwidth
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show e1exchange
pcu show e1exchange
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in E1 exchange table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show e1exchange {<RPPUNo>[<E1No>]} |all |{where <Conditions>}

[order by <FieldName>]
Options
E1No No. of E1 0~7
all Show all e1exchange

information

table,OP include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results

See Also
pcu add e1exchange

pcu del e1exchange
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show e1exchange
pcu set e1exchange
Notes
None.
Example
1) Inquire the configuration of No.0 E1 on N0.5 RPPU board in E1 exchange table.

pcu(advanced)# pcu show e1exchange 5
RPPUNo E1No ConnectType RelatedE1No SynchroInfo
5 0 bsc 1 yes
pcu(advanced)#
2) Inquire the configuration in E1 exchage table whose connecttype=BSC.
pcu(super)#pcu show e1exchange where connecttype=bsc
RPPUNo :0
E1No :0
ConnectType : bsc
RelatedE1No : 1
SynchroInfo : yes
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show e1slot
pcu show e1slot
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in E1 timeslot table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show e1slot {<RPPUNo>[<E1No>][<E1TimeSlot>]} |all |{where

<Conditions>} [order by <FieldName>]
Options
RPPUNo No. of RPPU board 0~5, 10~15
E1No No. of E1 on the RPPU 0~7

board
E1TimeSlot No. of timeslot on the E1 0~127
all Show all E1 timeslot

information of all logical
cells

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results

See Also
pcu add e1slot
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show e1slot
pcu del e1slot
pcu set e1slot
Notes
None.
Example
1) Inquire the configuration of No.24 timeslot of No.2 E1 on No.0 RPPU board in E1

timeslot table.
pcu(advanced)# pcu show e1slot 5
RPPUNo E1No E1Timeslot BSCNo E1Slot Usage
5 2 24 0 2 packetservice
pcu(advanced)#
2) Inquire the record in E1 slot table whose E1timeslot>65.
pcu(super)#pcu show e1slot where e1timeslot >65
RPPUNo E1No E1Timeslot BSCNo PCIC Usage
0 0 66 0 94 lapdlink
0 0 67 0 126 lapdlink
0 0 71 0 126 lapdlink
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show extmsrpar
pcu show extmsrpar
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in extended measure parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show extmsrpar <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show extended

measurement parameters

<ValueList>" <FieldName>
is field name in this
table,OP include ">", "<",
"=", ">=", "<=", "<>",
"between".
Results

See Also
pcu add extmsrpar

pcu del extmsrpar
pcu set extmsrpar
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show extmsrpar
Notes
None.
Example
1) Inquire the configuration of No.0 cell in extended measure parameter table.

pcu(advanced)#pcu show extmsrpar 0
LCNo : 0
ExtMeasOrd: em0
NccPermited: 1
IntFrequency : 1
ExtRptType: type1
ExtRptPeriod : 60sec
pcu(advanced)#
2) Inquire the record in extended measure parameter table whose ExtRpttype=3.
pcu(super)#pcu show extmsrpar where extrpttype=type3
LCNo ExtMeasOrd NccPermited IntFrequency ExtRptType ExtRptPeriod
2 em1 1 1 type3 240sec
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show gprs
pcu show gprs
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in GPRS options table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show gprs <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by <FieldName>]
Options
all Show GPRS information of

all logical cells

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results
See Also
pcu add gprs

pcu del gprs
pcu set gprs
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show gprs
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the record in GPRS optons table whose LCNo>5.
pcu(super)#pcu show gprs where lcno>5
The GPRS numbers is 2
(a)LCNo (b)NMO (c)T3168 (d)T3192 (e)DRXTimerMax (f)AccBurst
(g)ControlAckType (h)BsCvMax (i)PanDec (j)PanInc (k)PanMax
(l)EGPRSSuppot
GPRS 0 :
(a)6 (b)0 (c)1500ms (d)1500ms (e)2s (f)11bit (g)1 (h)8 (i)2 (j)2
(k)8 (l)no
GPRS 1 :
(a)7 (b)0 (c)1500ms (d)1500ms (e)2s (f)11bit (g)1 (h)8 (i)2 (j)2
(k)8 (l)no
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show lapd
pcu show lapd
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in LAPD table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show lapd <LAPDNo> |all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
LAPDNo No. of LAPD link. 0~254
all Show all LAPD link

information

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
FieldName Sort field name 0~63
Results

See Also
pcu add lapd

pcu del lapd
pcu set lapd
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show lapd
Notes
None.
Example
1) Inquire the configuration of No.1LAPD link in LAPD table.

pcu(advanced)#pcu show lapd 1
LAPDNo: 1
RPPUNo: 0
E1No: 0
StartTS: 512
BSCNo: 1
pcu(advanced)#
2) Inquire the configuration in LAPD table whose BSCNo=0.
pcu(super)#pcu show lapd where bscno=0
LAPDNo RPPUNo E1No StartTS BSCNo LAPDName
0 0 0 64 0 Lapd0
1 0 0 68 0 Lapd1
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show lccell
pcu show lccell
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in logical cell table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show lccell <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show Gb cell information

corresponding to all
logical cells

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results
See Also
pcu add lccell

pcu del lccell
pcu set lccell
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show lccell
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the configuration of No.1 cell in logical cell table.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show lccell 1
LCNo: 1
RprForInsert: 3
MaxRptNumGap: 5
MaxRptTime: 80
SsbLength: 5
SsbUpThd: 6
SsbDownThd: 6
BerUpThd: 5
BerDownThd: 5
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show ncreselectpar
pcu show ncreselectpar
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in neighbour cell reselect parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show ncreselectpar <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show neighbour cell

reselection
information of all
logical cells
Conditions Condition format "<FieldName> OP <ValueList>"

expressions <FieldName> is field name in this
table,OP include ">", "<", "=", ">=",
"<=", "<>", "between".
Results
See Also

Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show ncreselectpar
Notes
None.
Example
1) Inquire the configuration of No.0 cell in neighbour cell reselect parameter table.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show ncreselectpar 0
LCNo: 0
GPRSTempOffset: 10dB
GPRSPenaltyTime: 10sec
RslctOffset: -2dB
pcu(advanced)#
2) Inquire the configuration in neighbour cell reselect parameter table whose
GPRSTempOffset=10dB.
pcu(super)#pcu show ncreselectpar where GPRSTempOffset=10db
LCNo GPRSTempOffset GPRSPenaltyTime RslctOffset
0 10db 10sec -2db
1 10db 10sec -2db
2 10db 10sec -2db
3 10db 10sec -2db
4 10db 10sec -2db
5 10db 10sec -2db
6 10db 10sec -2db
7 10db 10sec -2db
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show neighbour
pcu show neighbour
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in neighbour cell table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show neighbour <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show neighbour cell

cells

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
FieldName Sort field name 0~63
Results
See Also
pcu add neighbour

pcu del neighbour
pcu set neighbour
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show neighbour
Notes
None.
Example
1) Inquire the all the configuration in neighbour cell table.

pcu(advanced)#pcu show neighbour all
LCNo NCNo
0 1
0 2
0 3
0 4
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
pcu(advanced)#
2) Inquire the record in neighbour cell table whose LCNo=0
pcu(advanced)#pcu show neighbour where lcno=0
LCNo NCNo
0 1
0 2
0 3
0 4
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show nwctrlmsrpar
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in network control measurement table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show
<LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by <FieldName>]
nwctrlmsrpar
Options
all Show network control

measurement information

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results

See Also

Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show nwctrlmsrpar
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the configuration of No.0 cell in network control measurement table.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show nwctrlmsrpar 0
LCNo :0
NonDrxPeriod : 0.24sec
RptPeriodI : 15.36sec
RptPeriodT : 0.96sec
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show pccch
pcu show pccch
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in PCCCH table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show pccch <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show PCCCH information


<ValueList>" <FieldName> is field
name in this table,OP include ">",
"<", "=", ">=", "<=", "<>", "between".
Results

See Also
pcu add pccch

pcu del pccch
pcu set pccch
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show pccch
Notes
None.
Example
1) Inquire the configuration of No.0 cell in PCCCH table.

pcu(advanced)#pcu show pccch 0
LCNo: 0
BSPBCCHBlks: 1
BSPAGBlksRes: 3
BSPRACHBlks: 4
pcu(advanced)#
2) Inquire the record in PCCCH table whose BSPBCCHBlks=3.
pcu(super)#pcu show pccch where BSPBCCHBlks=3
LCNo BSPBCCHBlks BSPAGBlksRes BSPRACHBlks
2 3 7 8
3 3 7 8
4 3 7 8
5 3 7 8
6 3 7 8
7 3 7 8
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show pdchpar
pcu show pdchpara
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in PDCH parameter table.
Mode
Basic user mode, Advanced user mode, Super user mode
Usage
pcu show pdchpara <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show PDCHPara

information of all
logical cells
Conditions Condition format "<FieldName> OP

expressions <ValueList>" <FieldName> is
include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results
See Also
pcu add pdchpara

pcu del pdchpara
pcu set pdchpara
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show pdchpar
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the configuration of No.0 cell in PDCH parameter table.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show pdchpara 0
LCNo: 0
MaxUlHighLd: 7
MaxDlHighLd: 4
MaxUlLowLd: 4
MaxDlLowLd: 3
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show prach
pcu show prach
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in PRACH table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show prach <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show PRACH

cells

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results
See Also
pcu add prach

pcu del prach
pcu set prach
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show prach
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the record in PRACH table whose s=12.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show prach where s=12
The PRACH numbers is 4
(a)LCNo (b)AccControlClass (c)MaxRetrans1 (d)MaxRetrans2
(e)MaxRetrans3 (f)MaxRetrans4 (g)S (h)TxInt (i)PL1 (j)PL2
(k)PL3 (l)PL4
PRACH 0 :
(a)0 (b)1 (c)1 (d)2 (e)4 (f)7 (g)12 (h)10 (i)12 (j)13 (k)14 (l)16
PRACH 1 :
(a)1 (b)1 (c)1 (d)2 (e)4 (f)7 (g)12 (h)10 (i)12 (j)13 (k)14 (l)16
PRACH 2 :
(a)2 (b)1 (c)1 (d)2 (e)4 (f)7 (g)12 (h)10 (i)12 (j)13 (k)14 (l)16
PRACH 3 :
(a)3 (b)1 (c)1 (d)2 (e)4 (f)7 (g)12 (h)10 (i)12 (j)13 (k)14 (l)16
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show psi1
pcu show psi1
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in PSI1 table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show psi1 <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by <FieldName>]
Options
all Show related information of

PSI1 of all logical cells

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results
See Also
pcu add psi1

pcu del psi1
pcu set psi1
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show psi1
Notes
None.
Example
1) Inquire the configuration of No.0 cell in PSI1 tabl.

pcu(advanced)#pcu show psi1 0
LCNo: 0
PSI1Rpt: 5
MeasOrder: no
PSIStatusInd: no
BCCH: 75
pcu(advanced)#
2) Inauire the record in PSI1 table whose BCCHƒ70.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show psi1 where bcch>=70
LCNo PSI1Rpt MeasOrder PSIStatusInd BCCH
4 5 no no 70
5 5 no no 75
6 5 no no 80
7 5 no no 85
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show pwpar
pcu show pwpar
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in power control table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show pwpar <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show power control

parameters of all logical
cells

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results
See Also
pcu add pwpar

pcu del pwpar
pcu set pwpar
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show pwpar
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the configuration of No.1 cell in power control table.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show pwpar 1
LCNo :1
ALPHA : 0.2
TAVGW :2
TAVGT :2
PB : -4dB
PCMeasChan : bcch
MeasChAvail : no
NAVGI :2
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show relatedinfo
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in related information table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show relatedinfo <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show all related system

cells

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show relatedinfo
See Also
pcu add relatedinfo

pcu del relatedinfo
pcu set relatedinfo
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire all the configuration in related information table.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show relatedinfo all
LCNo NCO BSIC SpgcCCCHSup PriorityAccessThr RAColor
1 NC1 10 no 3 0
2 NC1 10 no 3 0
3 NC1 10 no 3 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show reselectpar
pcu show reselectpar
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in reselect parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show reselectpar <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show reselect

information of all
logical cells
Conditions Condition format "<FieldName> OP

expressions <ValueList>" <FieldName> is
include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show reselectpar
See Also
pcu add reselectpar

pcu del reselectpar
pcu set reselectpar
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the record in reselect parameter table whose Tresel=10second
pcu(advanced)#pcu show reselectpar where tresel=10sec
The ReselectPar numbers is 5
(a)LCNo (b)GPRSCellReselctHyesteresis (c)C31Hyst (d)C32Qual
(e)RandAccessRetry (f)TResel (g)RAReselectHyst
ReselectPar 0 :
(a)0 (b)2db (c)c31standard (d)0 (e)yes (f)10sec (g)2db
ReselectPar 1 :
ReselectPar 2 :
ReselectPar 3 :
ReselectPar 4 :
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show sattrans
pcu show sattrans
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in sattrans parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show sattrans <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show service cell

cells

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show sattrans
See Also
pcu add sattrans

pcu del sattrans
pcu set sattrans
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire all the configuration in sattrans parameter table.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show sattrans all
2 record(s) satisfying condition in table SatTrans
LCNo SuprtSatTrans
1 no
4 yes
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show servpar
pcu show servpar
Function
This command is used to inquire a record in service parameter table.
Mode
Usage
pcu show servpar <LCNo>|all |{where <Conditions>} [order by

<FieldName>]
Options
all Show service cell

cells

include ">", "<", "=", ">=", "<=",
"<>", "between".
Results
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu show servpar
See Also
pcu add servpar

pcu del servpar
pcu set servpar
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the configuration of No.1 cell in service parameter table.
pcu(advanced)#pcu show servpar 1
LCNo: 1
CellBarAccess2: permit
ExcAcc: noexclusive
RxLevAccMin: 60
MsTxPwrMax: 5
PriorClass: 2
GPRSHCSThr: -108dB
MultiBandRep: 0
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu switch set celltransferflag
pcu switch set celltransferflag
Function
This command is used to set the cell transfer flag of PCU.
Mode
Usage
pcu switch set celltransferflag <Value>
Options
Value Value of celltransferflag On- the cell on the error RPPU

board will transfer to the standby
RPPU board
Off- the cell on the error RPPU
board will not transfer to the
standby RPPU board
Results

See Also
pcu switch show all

pcu switch show celltransferflag
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu switch set celltransferflag
Example
Turn on the switch and make the cell on the error RPPU board transfer to the standby
board automatically.
pcu(advanced)#pcu switch set celltransferflag on
pcu(advanced)#
Turn off the switch and make the cell on the error RPPU board from transfering to the
standby board.
pcu(advanced)#pcu switch set celltransferflag off
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu switch set gbtransferflag
pcu switch set gbtransferflag
Function
This command is used to set the GB transfer flag of PCU.
Mode
Usage
pcu switch set gbtransferflag <Value>
Options
Value Value of gbtransferflag Value range : "on" or "off",

If this switch is "on", then
PTP/SIGs on the error RPPU
board will transfer to standby
RPPU board.
If "off", nothing happens
Results

See Also
pcu switch show all

pcu switch show gbtransferflag
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu switch set gbtransferflag
Example
Turn on the switch and make the PTP/SIGs on the error RPPU board transfer to the
standby board automatically.
pcu(advanced)#pcu switch set gbtransferflag on
pcu(advanced)#
Turn off the switch and make the PTP/SIGs on the error RPPU board from transfering
to the standby board.
pcu(advanced)#pcu switch set gbtransferflag off
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu switch show all
pcu switch show all
Function
This command is used to inquire all switches of PCU.
Mode
Usage
pcu switch show all
Options
None.
Results
Success Show the related information

See Also
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire all switches of PCU.
pcu(advanced)#pcu switch show all
CellTransferFlag: OFF
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu switch show celltransferflag
Function
This command is used to inquire the cell transfer flag of PCUs.
Mode
Usage
Options
None.
Results

See Also
pcu switch set celltransferflag
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the current status of cellTransferFlag.
pcu(advanced)#pcu switch show celltransferflag
CellTransferFlag: OFF
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pcu switch show gbtransferflag
Function
This command is used to inquire the GB transfer flag of PCUe.
Mode
Usage
Options
None.
Results

See Also
pcu switch set gbtransferflag
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the current status of gbtransferflag.
pcu(advanced)#pcu switch show gbtransferflag
GbTransferFlag: OFF
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pmc reset
pmc reset
Function
This command is used to reset L2PU board.
Mode
super user mode
Usage
pmc reset <BoardNo>
Options
BoardNo The No. of L2PU board 16~27, 36~47
Results
Success operation successful

See Also
pmc version
Notes
None.
Example
Reset the No. 45 L2PU board.
pcu(super)# pmc reset 45
WARNING: Operation will reset the board! Continue ?[Y/N]y
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pmc reset
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pmc version query running
pmc version query running
Function
This command is used to query the running software version on L2PU board.
Mode
super user mode
Usage
pmc version query running <BoardNo>
Options
Results

See Also
pmc version query starting
Notes
None.
Example
Query the running software version on the No.38 L2PU board.
pcu(super)# pmc version query running 38
Running Version: No MTP2
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pmc version query starting
Function
This command is used to query the starting software version on L2PU board.
Mode
super user mode
Usage
pmc version query starting <BoardNo>
Options
Results

See Also
Notes
None.
Example
Query the starting software version on the No.38 L2PU board.
pcu(super)# pmc version query starting 38
Starting Version: max
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pmc version set running
pmc version set running
Function
This command is used to set the running software version of specified L2PU board.
Mode
super user mode
Usage
pmc version set running <BoardNo> <Version>
Options
Version The version of software mtp2, nomtp2
Results

See Also
Notes
None
Example
Set the running software version of No. 38 L2PU board to be mtp2.
pcu(super)# pmc version set running 38 mtp2
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pmc version set running
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pmc version set starting
pmc version set starting
Function
This command is used to set the starting software version of specified L2PU board.
Mode
super user mode
Usage
pmc version set starting <BoardNo> <Version>
Options
Version The version of software max, bios
Results

See Also
Notes
None
Example
Set the starting software version of No. 38 L2PU board to be max.
pcu(super)# pmc version set starting 38 max
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit pmc version set starting
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit route add
route add
Function
This command is used to add the information of the route.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
route add <Destination> <Mask> <Gateway>
Options
Destination Destination address
Mask Subnet mask value to be associated with

this route entry
Gateway Gateway address
Returned Result

See Also
route set
route show
route del
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit route add
Example
Add the route and specify the destination address as 10.121.0.0, subnet mask as
255.255.0.0, gateway as 129.12.120.106.
pcu(super)# route add 10.121.0.0 255.255.0.0 129.12.230.106
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit route del
route del
Function
This command is used to delete the route information.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
route del <Destination> <Mask>
Options
Mask Subnet mask value to be associated with this route entry
Returned Result

See Also
route add
route set
route show
Notes
None.
Example
Delete the route whose destination address is 10.121.0.0 and subnet mask is
255.255.0.0.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit route del
pcu(super)# route del 10.121.0.0 255.255.0.0
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit route set
route set
Function
This command is used to modify the route information.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
route set <Destination> <Mask> <Gateway>
Options
Mask Subnet mask value to be associated with this route entry
Gateway Gateway address
Returned Result

See Also
route add
route show
route del
Notes
None.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit route set
Example
Modify the route information of the system, and specify the destination address as
10.121.0.0, subnet mask as 255.255.0.0, gateway as 129.12.230.106.
pcu(super)# route set 10.121.0.0 255.255.0.0 129.12.230.106
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit route show
route show
Function
This command is used to inquire the route information.
Mode
Super user mode
Usage
nsvc show
Options
None.
Returned Result
Success Show the information related

See Also
route add
route set
route del
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the route information configured.
pcu(super)# route show
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit route show
Destination address Subnet Mask Gateway
10.121.0.0 255.255.0.0 129.12.230.106
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit show client
show client
Function
This command is used to inquire current client information.
Command Mode
Usage
show client
Options
None.
Results
See Also
None
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the current client information..
pcu(advanced)#show client
Client ID IP Address
2555904 129.102.1.92
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit show client
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit show clock
show clock
Function
This command is used to inquire the date and clock of the system.
Command Mode
Usage
show clock
Options
None.
Results
See Also
None
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the current clock information of the system.
pcu(advanced)#show clock
8:18:28 May 6 2001
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit show history
show history
Function
This command is used to inquire the latest command entered.
Command Mode
super user mode
Usage
show history
Options
None.
Results
See Also
None
Notes
This command can show the latest ten pieces of command entered.
Example
Inquire the latest command entered.
pcu(advanced)# show history
enable
configure
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit show history
interface serial 0
ip address 129.102.0.1 255.255.0.0
exit
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit show running-config
show running-config
Function
This command is used to inquire current operating configuration.
Command Mode
advanced user mode, super user mode
Usage
show running-config
Options
None.
Results
See Also
show startup-config
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the current effective configuration.
pcu(advanced)# show running-config
Now create configuration...
Current configuration
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit show running-config
slot add 0 RPPU lapd lapd
PCU ADD E1Slot 0 0 4 0 129 packetservice
……
pcu(advanced)#
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit show startup-config
show startup-config
Function
This command is used to display configurations in FLASH.
Command Mode
advanced user mode, super user mode
Usage
show startup-config
Options
None.
Results
See Also
show running-config
Notes
None.
Example
Inquire the configurations in FLASH.
pcu(advanced)# show start-config
Read and display startup config....
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit show startup-config
……
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit slot add
slot add
Function
This command is used to add the configuration of a board in a frame.
Mode
Usage
slot add <SlotNo ><BoardClass ><L2PU0><L2PU1>
Options
SlotNo Slot No. 0~6, 8, 10~15
BoardClass The type of the board pomu, rppu
L2PU0 PMCFR, L2PUFR, lapd,

The type of No.0 L2PU board
none
L2PU1 PMCFR, L2PUFR, lapd,

The type of No.1 L2PU board
none
Results
See Also
slot show
slot del
Notes
1) If the L2PU type is "none", it means that the L2PU board is not installed.
2) The type of L2PU on POMU must be "none", and on RPPU board,
"PMCFR",”L2PUFR” "lapd" or "none". But as for the RPPU board, at least one
L2PU board whose type is not "none" must be configured.
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit slot add
3) The board type in PCU can only be specified as "POMU" or "RPPU"
Example
Add a RPPU board in No.0 slot, the type of both L2PU board on which are LAPD.
pcu(advanced)# slot add 0 rppu lapd lapd
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit slot del
slot del
Function
This command is used to delete the configuration of a board in a frame.
Mode
Usage
slot del <SlotNo >
Options
Results

See Also
slot add
slot show
Notes
Delete a board in a slot. The FR, NS, and BSSGP in the board must be deleted first.
Example
Delete the RPPU board in No.0 slot.
pcu(advanced)# slot del 0
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit slot del
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit slot show
slot show
Function
This command is used to inquery the information of the board configured.
Mode
Basic maintenance mode, Advanced user mode, super user mode.
Usage
slot show <SlotNo> | all
Options
All Inquery the information of all

None
the board in the frame
Results
Success Display the information related

See Also
slot add
slot del
Notes
None.
Example
Inquery the information of board in No.0 slot.
pcu(advanced)#slot show 0
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit slot show
SlotNo :0
BoardClass : rppu
L2PU0 : lapd
L2PU1 : lapd
Status : normal
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit snmp add traphost
snmp add traphost
Function
This command is used to add trap host IP address for SNMP.
Mode
Usage
snmp add traphost <TrapHost>
Options
TrapHost Trap Host IP address(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Returned Result

See Also
snmp del traphost
Notes
The number of Host IP address must not exceed 5.
Example
pcu(super)#snmp add traphost 129.12.222.90
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit snmp del traphost
snmp del traphost
Function
This command is used to delete trap host IP address for SNMP.
Mode
Advance user mode, super user mode
Usage
snmp del traphost <TrapHost>
Options
TrapHost Trap Host IP address(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Returned Result

See Also
snmp add traphost
Notes
None.
Example
pcu(super)#snmp del traphost 129.12.222.90
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit snmp set contact
snmp set contact
Function
This command is used to set contact information of SNMP management personel.
Mode
Usage
snmp set contact <Contact>
Options
Contact Contact information of SNMP network management personnel,

a string up to 64 character
Returned Result

See Also
snmp set location
Notes
None.
Example
pcu (super)#snmp set contact huawei
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit snmp set heartbeattrap
snmp set heartbeattrap
Function
This command is used to set heartbeat trap flag for SNMP.
Mode
Usage
snmp set
<Flag>
heartbeattrap
Options
Flag Flag Heartbeat trap flag, value range : Enable, Disable
Returned Result

See Also
snmp set trap
Notes
PCU will send heartbeat trap when both trap flag and heartbeat trap flag are set
Enable.
Example
pcu(super)# snmp set heartbeattrap enable
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit snmp set location
snmp set location
Function
This command is used to set location of device for SNMP.
Mode
Advance user mode, super user mode
Usage
snmp set location <Location>
Options
Location Location information of device, a string up to 64 characters
Returned Result

See Also
snmp set contact
Notes
None.
Example
pcu(super)# snmp set location shanghai
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit snmp set rocommunity
snmp set rocommunity
Function
This command is used to set read-only community for SNMP.
Mode
Usage
snmp set rocommunity <RoCommunity>
Options
RoCommunity Read-only Community, a string up to 32 characters
Returned Result

See Also
snmp set rwcommunity
Notes
None.
Example
pcu (super)# snmp set rocommunity public
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit snmp set rwcommunity
snmp set rwcommunity
Function
This command is used to set read-write community for SNMP.
Mode
Usage
snmp set rwocommunity <RwCommunity>
Options
RwCommunity Read-write Community, a string up to 32 characters
Returned Result

See Also
snmp set rocommunity
Notes
None.
Example
pcu (super)# snmp set rwcommunity private
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit snmp set trap
snmp set trap
Function
This command is used to set trap flag for SNMP.
Mode
Usage
snmp set trap <Flag>
Options
Flag Trap flag, value range : Enable, Disable
Returned Result

See Also
snmp show all
Notes
None.
Example
pcu (super)# snmp set trap enable
pcu(super)#
Page 1 of 1
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit snmp show all
snmp show all
Function
This command is used to show all parameters for SNMP.
Mode
Usage
snmp show all
Options
None.
Returned Result
Succeed Show the information required

See Also
None.
Notes
None.
Example
pcu (super)# snmp show all
Ro community : public
Rw community : private
Contact : huawei
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit snmp show all
Trap Flag : enable
HeartBeat Trap Flag : enable
Trap Host : 129.12.222.90
Trap Host : 129.12.222.209
Location : shanghai
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit super
super
Function
This command is used to enter super user configuration mode.
Mode
Normal user mode
Usage
super
Option
None.
Results
Success Ask the operator for the user name and admission key
See Also
exit
user password
Notes
None.
Example
Enter the super user mode. (Consider the user name to this mode is Jack and the
pcu>super
Password: (Input 123321, then <Enter>)
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit super
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit user add
user add
Function
This command is used to add a PCU user.
Mode
super user mode (User name is supervisor)
Usage
user add
Options
None
Results
See Also
user delete
user setpwd
user password
user show
Notes
1) User name, user password and user level are needed.

2) User name. Case insensitive, maximum length is 20, first character should be a
letter, and followed by letter, number, '-', '_' or '.', shouldn't be the same as user
level and "all"
3) User password. Case sensitive, maximum length is 15, excess part will be
ignored
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit user add
4) User level. Case insensitive, value range: "basic" , "advanced" or "super"
Example
Add a user, whose name is zhangshan, password is main123, and user level is
advanced
pcu(super)# use add
User name:zhangshan
Password:
Confirm password:
User level: advanced
Operating result has been saved both in Active POMU and in Standby POMU
successfully
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit user delete
user delete
Function
This command is used to delete users of PCU
Mode
super user mode (User name is supervisor).
Usage
user delete <UserName> | <UserLevel> | all
Options
UserName User name, case insensitive None
"basic" ,
UserLevel User level, case insensitive, value range: "advanced"
"super"
all Delete all the PCU Users None
Results

See Also
user add
user setpwd
user password
user show
Notes
None
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit user delete
Example
Delete a user whose name is zhangshan
pcu(super)#use del zhangshan
Are you sure? [Y/N]y
successfully
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit user password
user password
Function
This command is used to modify their his own password by a PCU user
Mode
Basic user mode, advanced user mode, super user mode.
Usage
user password
Options
None.
Results
Success Ask the operator for current and new password.
See Also
user add
user delete
user setpwd
user show
Notes
None
Example
A super level user modify his own password from gprs123 to gprs321
pcu(super)# user password
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit user password
Current password: (Input old password: gprs123)
New password: (Input new password: gprs321)
Confirm new password: (Input new password: gprs321)
successfully
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit user setpwd
user setpwd
Function
This command is used to delete users of PCU
Mode
super user mode(with the user name supervisor).
Usage
user setpwd <UserName>
Options
UserName User name, case insensitive None
Results
Success Ask the operator for current and new password.

See Also
user add
user delete
user password
user show
Notes
1) This command is used to reset a PCU user's password by SUPERVISOR

2) SUPERVISOR can use "user password" to change his own password3)
3) The password is case sensitive, maximum length is 15, excess part will be
ignored
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit user setpwd
Example
Set the password of user zhangsan to gprs123 by user supervisor
pcu(super)# user setpwd zhangsan
New password: (Input password: gprs123)
Confirm new password: (Input password: gprs123)
successfully
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit user show
user show
Function
This command is used to show users of PCU
Mode
super user mode( with the user name supervisor).
Usage
user show <UserLevel> | all
Options
"basic"
UserLevel User level, case insensitive "advanced"
"super"
all Show all the PCU Users
Results
Success Show user information about PCU

See Also
user add
user delete
user password
user setpwd
Notes
None
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit user show
Example
Show all PCU user information.
pcu(super)#user show all
lisi basic
testba basic
testad advanced
zhangsan1 advanced
lsf super
Basic: 2, Advanced: 2, Super: 1.
Total User Number: 5.
pcu(super)#
Page 2 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit write
write
Function
This command is used to write running configuration to the FLASH memory.
Mode
Usage
write
Option
None.
Results
See Also
erase
Notes
When a set of data has been configured and complies with their expected functions,
these configuration data should be saved in FLASH Memory.
Example
Write the data to the FLASH Memory.
pcu(advanced)#write
It will update the configuration in the flash memory
Are you sure ?[Y/N]y
Page 1 of 2
Command Reference
M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit write
Now writing the running config to flash memory
Please wait for a while....
Write the running config to flash memory successfully
pcu(advanced)#
Page 2 of 2

Command Reference

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Command Reference

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part 1 Guide to the Manual

Table of Contents ......................................................................................... i

1. Guide to the Manual

M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit

Manual Version T2-031949-20050205-C-3.36

Product Version V300R003

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

It provides an overall introduction to the PCU, including the

M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit

M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit

M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit

M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit

Organization of the Manual

The manual consists of 2 modules.

Module 1 is a overall introduction of how to user the command,

The manual is intended for the following readers:

This document uses the following conventions:

Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Bold Headings, Command, Command Description are in boldface.

II. Command conventions

[] Elements in square brackets [ ] are optional.

Optional alternative keywords are grouped in square brackets and separated by

Alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A

Optional alternative keywords are grouped in square brackets and separated by

! A line starting with an exclamation mark is comments.

Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary description.

M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit

Part 1 Guide to the Manual

Guide to the Manual ......................................................................................................................... 1

Guide to the Manual

M900/M1800 Packet Control Unit Command Reference provides detailed

All commands described in the manual are arranged in alphabetical order.

Table 1-1 Structure of command description part in command reference

II. Relative documentation

Operation section inM900/M1800 Packet Control Unit Operation Manual.

III. Terminal setup

IV. Command format

The parameter part is optional according to different commands. The number of

--- Key word part: in bold letters

--- Parameter part: in italic

In describing parameters, this manual makes use of the following symbols:

Table 1-2 Parameter format regulation

Symbol Meaning Example

Symbol Meaning Example

VI. Command mode

z Normal user mode

Super user mode:

Specific commands to be executed in different modes are briefly introduced in

Table 1-3 PCU operation commands in different command modes

Command Mode Executable Command Command Description

Command Mode Executable Command Command Description

VII. Input command

PCU MML command input should be in conformity to the following rules:

Table 1-4 Command line editing function keys

VIII. Command line help

PCU MML provides the following online help:

Figure 1-1 Command line help (1)

Figure 1-2 Command line help (2)